Marantz Home Theater System SR9600 User Manual

Model SR9600 User Guide  
AV Surround Receiver  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
INTRODUCTION  
Thank you for purchasing the Marantz SR9600  
INTRODUCTION.................................. 1 BASIC OPERATION (PLAYBACK) ... 48  
SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE ................................ 48  
Surround Receiver.  
PRECAUTIONS ................................... 1  
i.LINK FUNCTION ......................................................... 48  
This remarkable component has been engineered  
to provide you with many years of home theater  
enjoyment. Please take a few minutes to read this  
manual thoroughly before you connect and  
operate the SR9600.  
As there are a number of connection and  
configuration options, you are encouraged to  
discuss your own particular home theater setup  
with your Marantz A/V specialist dealer.  
DESCRIPTION..................................... 2  
FEATURES .......................................... 4  
ACCESSORIES ................................... 5  
VIDEO CONVERT ......................................................... 48  
SELECTING THE SURROUND MODE ......................... 49  
ADJUSTING THE MAIN VOLUME ................................ 49  
ADJUSTING THE TONE (BASS & TREBLE) CONTROL ... 49  
TEMPORARILY TURNING OFF THE SOUND .............. 49  
USING THE SLEEP TIMER........................................... 49  
NIGHT MODE ................................................................ 50  
DIALOGUE NORMALIZATION MESSAGE ................... 50  
RE-EQ ........................................................................... 50  
LIP.SYNC ....................................................................... 50  
FRONT PANEL .................................... 6  
FL DISPLAY AND INDICATOR ........................................ 7  
REAR PANEL ...................................... 8  
REMOTE CONTROLLER RC3200B . 10  
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS............................................ 10  
LOADING BATTERIES .................................................. 10  
REMOTE-CONTROLLABLE RANGE............................ 10  
ACTIVATING THE RC3200B ......................................... 11  
OPERATING DEVICES ................................................. 11  
A/V AMP ........................................................................ 12  
MULTI ROOM A/B ......................................................... 13  
TUNER 1/2 .................................................................... 15  
RECORDING MACROS ................................................ 15  
SHOW THE SR9600 STATUS ON THE RC3200B........ 16  
WORKING WITH MODES ............................................. 17  
ADJUSTING THE SETTINGS ....................................... 17  
LEARNING COMMANDS .............................................. 19  
RC3200B SETUP .......................................................... 20  
IMPORTANT NOTICES ................................................. 20  
CLEANING RC3200B .................................................... 20  
HOW TO RESET THE RC3200B .................................. 20  
PRECAUTIONS  
SURROUND MODE........................... 51  
SURROUND .................................................................. 51  
SOURCE DIRECT ......................................................... 51  
PURE DIRECT .............................................................. 51  
DO NOT LOCATE IN THE FOLLOWING PLACES  
To ensure long-lasting use, do not locate the  
SR9600 where it is:  
• Exposed to direct sunlight.  
OTHER FUNCTION ........................... 55  
• Near sources of heat such as heaters.  
• In highly humid or poorly ventilated environments.  
• Dusty.  
VIDEO AUTO ON/OFF FUNCTION ............................... 55  
AUTO VIDEO SELECTOR (AUTO VIDEO SEL) ........... 55  
ATTENUATION TO ANALOG INPUT SIGNAL .............. 55  
LISTENING THROUGH HEADPHONES ...................... 55  
DOLBY HEADPHONE MODE ....................................... 55  
VIDEO ON/OFF ............................................................. 56  
DISPLAY MODE ............................................................ 56  
SELECTING ANALOG AUDIO INPUT OR DIGITAL  
AUDIO INPUT ........................................................... 56  
RECORDING AN ANALOG SOURCE ........................... 56  
7.1 CH INPUT ................................................................ 57  
SPEAKER A/B ............................................................... 57  
AUX2 INPUT.................................................................. 57  
• Subjected to mechanical vibrations.  
• On wobbly, inclined or otherwise unstable  
surfaces.  
• In locations such as in cramped audio racks  
where radiated heat is blocked. To ensure  
proper heat radiation, ensure the below  
clearance from walls and other equipment.  
CONNECTIONS................................. 21  
SPEAKER PLACEMENT ............................................... 21  
CONNECTING SPEAKERS .......................................... 21  
CONNECTING AUDIO COMPONENTS........................ 22  
CONNECTING VIDEO COMPONENTS........................ 23  
ADVANCED CONNECTION .......................................... 25  
CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL JACKS ....... 25  
CONNECTING THE ANTENNA TERMINALS ............... 26  
CONNECTING FOR MULTIROOM LISTENING ........... 27  
CONNECTING i.LINK COMPONENTS ......................... 28  
CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT........................... 29  
BASIC OPERATION (TUNER) .......... 58  
Above  
8 inchs (20 cm)  
or more  
LISTENING TO THE TUNER ........................................ 58  
PRESET MEMORY ....................................................... 59  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR9600  
Left  
8 inchs (20 cm)  
or more  
Right  
8 inchs (20 cm)  
or more  
VOLUME  
INPUT SELECTOR  
MULTIROOM  
SYSTEM ............................................ 61  
DOWN  
UP  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
DOWN  
TUNING  
UP  
BAND  
F/P  
SURROUND  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
MODE  
AUTO  
MULTI  
AUTO TUNE  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
MRAC  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX 1 INPUT  
DIGITAL  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
MIC  
MULTIROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI ROOM  
OUT TERMINALS ..................................................... 61  
MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI SPEAKER  
TERMINALS ............................................................. 61  
OPERATION OF THE MULTIROOM OUTPUTS WITH THE  
REMOTE CONTROL FROM MULTI A OR B ROOM ..... 62  
SETUP ............................................... 30  
Rear  
8 inchs (20 cm)  
or more  
ONSCREEN DISPLAY MENU SYSTEM ....................... 30  
1 INPUT SETUP ........................................................... 32  
2 SPKR (SPEAKER) SETUP........................................ 35  
3 SURROUND SETUP ................................................. 41  
4 VIDEO SETUP ........................................................... 43  
5 PREFERENCE .......................................................... 44  
6 ACOUSTIC EQ .......................................................... 46  
7 AUDIO STATUS ......................................................... 47  
TROUBLESHOOTING ....................... 63  
HDMI.............................................................................. 64  
i.LINK (AUDIO) .............................................................. 64  
TECHNICAL  
SPECIFICATIONS ............................. 65  
DIMENSIONS .................................... 65  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THX need not be activated for music, movies made  
especially for TV, or shows such as sports  
programming, talk shows, etc.  
This is because they were originally mixed for a  
small room environment.  
DESCRIPTION  
THX Surround EXDolby DIgital Surround EX is a  
joint development of Dolby Laboratories and THX  
Ltd.  
DTS was introduced in 1994 to provide 5.1 channels  
of discrete digital audio into home theater systems.  
DTS brings you premium quality discrete  
multichannel digital sound to both movies and  
music.  
DTS is a multichannel sound system designed to  
create full range digital sound reproduction.  
The no compromise DTS digital process sets the  
standard of quality for cinema sound by delivering  
an exact copy of the studio master recordings to  
neighborhood and home theaters.  
In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have  
been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX  
technology are able to reproduce an extra channel  
which has been added during the mixing of the  
program. This channel, called Surround Back,  
places sounds behind the listener in addition to the  
currently available front left, front center, front  
right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer  
channels. This additional channel provides the  
opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the  
listener and brings more depth, spacious  
ambience and sound localization than ever before.  
Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital  
Surround EX technology, when released into the  
home consumer market may exhibit wording to  
that effect on the packaging. A list of movies  
created using this technology can be found on the  
Dolby web site at www.dolby.com. A list of  
available DVD software titles encoded with this  
technology an be found at www.thx.com.  
Only receiver and controller products bearing the  
THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround  
EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology  
in the home. This product may also engage the  
THX Surround EX mode during the playback of 5.1  
channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround  
EX eocnded. In such case, the information  
delivered to the Surround Back channel will be  
program dependent and may or may not be very  
pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack  
and the tastes of the individual listener.  
THX and Ultra 2 are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of THX Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly  
developed technology of THX and Dolby  
Laboratories, Inc. and is a trademark of Dolby  
Laboratories, Inc. Used under authorization. All  
rights reserved.  
THX® is an exclusive set of standards and  
technologies established by the world-renowned  
film production company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX  
resulted from George Lucasdesire to reproduce  
the movie soundtrack as faithfully as possible both  
in the movie theater and in the home theater.  
THX engineers developed patented technologies  
to accurately translate the sound from a movie  
theater environment into the home, correcting the  
tonal and spatial errors that occur.  
When the THX mode of the SR9600 is on, three  
distinct THX technologies are automatically  
added:  
Re-Equalization-restores the correct tonal balance  
for watching a movie in a home environment.  
These sounds are otherwise mixed to be brighter  
for a large movie theater. Re-EQ compensates for  
this and prevents the soundtracks from being  
overly bright and harsh when played in a home  
theater.  
Timbre Matching-filters the information going to  
the surround speakers so they more closely match  
the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from  
the front speakers.  
This ensures seamless panning between the front and  
surround speakers.  
Adaptive Decorrelation-slightly changes one  
surround channels time and phase relationship  
with respect to the other surround channel.  
This expands the listening position and creates  
with only two surround speakers the same  
spacious surround experience as in a movie  
theater with multiple surround speakers.  
The Marantz SR9600 was required to pass a  
rigorous series of quality and performance tests, in  
addition to incorporating the technologies  
explained above, in order to be THX Ultra certified  
by Lucasfilm Ltd.  
Now, every moviegoer can hear the sound exactly  
as the moviemaker intended.  
DTS can be enjoyed in the home for either movies  
or music on of DVDs, LDs, and CDs.  
The THX Ultra2 specification provides  
uncompromised 7.1 channel playback of any multi-  
channel program, whether movie soundtracks or  
music over the widest possible seating area.  
There are an additional two processings for THX  
Ultra2 as bellow.  
DTSand DTS Digital Surroundare registered  
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
A.S.A. (Advanced Speaker Array)  
ASAis a proprietary THX technology which  
processes the sound fed to 2 surround and 2  
surround back speakers to provide the optimal  
surround sound experience. When you set up your  
home theater system using all eight speaker  
outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround Right,  
Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left,  
Surround Left and Subwoofer), placing the two  
Surround Back speakers close together facing the  
front of the room as shown in the diagram will  
provide the largest sweet spot. If for practical  
reasons you have to place the Surround Back  
speakers apart, you will need to go to the THX  
Audio Set-up screen and choose the setting that  
most closely corresponds to the speaker distance,  
which will re-optimize the surround sound-field.  
ASA is used in two new surround modes; THX  
Ultra2 Cinema, THX Music Mode and THX Games  
mode.  
The advantages of discrete multichannel systems  
over matrix are well known.  
But even in homes equipped for discrete  
multichannel, there remains a need for high-quality  
matrix decoding. This is because of the large  
library of matrix surround motion pictures available  
on disc and on VHS tape; and analog television  
broadcasts.  
The typical matrix decoder of today derives a  
center channel and a mono surround channel from  
two-channel matrix stereo material. It is better than  
a simple matrix in that it includes steering logic to  
improve separation, but because of its mono,  
band-limited surround it can be disappointing to  
users accustomed to discrete multichannel.  
SURROUND EX™” is a trademark of Dolby  
Laboratories. Used under authorization.  
Neo:6 offers several important improvements as  
follow,  
Neo:6 provides up to six full-band channels of  
matrix decoding from stereo matrix material.  
Users with 6.1 and 5.1 systems will derive six  
and five separate channels, respectively,  
corresponding to the standard home-theater  
speaker layouts.  
THX Ultra requirements cover every aspect of  
performance including pre-amplifier and power  
amplifier performance and operation, and  
hundreds of other parameters in both the digital  
and analog domain.  
Movies which have been encoded in Dolby Digital,  
DTS, Dolby Pro Logic, stereo and Mono will all  
benefit from the THX mode when being viewed.  
The THX mode should only be activated when  
watching movies which were originally produced  
for a movie theater environment.  
B.G.C. (Boundary Gain Compensation)  
If your chosen listening room layout (for practical or  
aesthetic reasons) results in most of the listeners  
being close to the rear wall, the resulting bass level  
can be sufficiently reinforced by the boundary that  
the overall sound quality becomes boomy. THX  
Ultra2 receivers contain the BGC (Boundary Gain  
Compensation) feature to provide an improved  
bass balance. BGC can be selected by choosing  
THX Ultra2 Subwoofer-Yesfrom the Boundary  
Gain Compensationsection of the THX Audio  
setup menu.  
Neo:6 technology allows various sound  
elements within a channel or channels to be  
steered separately, and in a way which follows  
naturally from the original presentation.  
Neo:6 offers a music mode to expand stereo  
nonmatrix recordings into the five- or six-  
channel layout, in a way which does not diminish  
the subtlety and integrity of the original stereo  
recording.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-  
motion video, for music programs and motion  
picture soundtracks on DVD-video.  
Dolby Surround encoded video cassettes and  
television programs with enhanced depth and  
spatiality. It can also process any high-quality  
stereo or Advanced Resolution 5.1-channel music  
content into a seamless 6.1- or 7.1-channel  
listening experience.  
Circle Surround II, TruSurround XT, Dialog Clarity,  
TruBass, SRS, and  
of SRS Labs, Inc.  
symbol are trademarks  
Circle Surround II, TruSurround XT, Dialog Clarity  
and TruBass technologies are incorporated under  
license from SRS Labs, Inc.  
DTSand DTS 96/24are trademarks of Digital  
Theater Systems, Inc.  
DTS-ES Extended Surround is a new multichannel  
digital signal format developed by Digital Theater  
Systems Inc. While offering high compatibility with  
the conventional DTS Digital Surround format,  
DTS-ES Extended Surround greatly improves the  
360-degree surround impression and space  
expression thanks to further expanded surround  
signals. This format has been used professionally  
in movie theaters since 1999.  
In addition to the 5.1 surround channels (FL, FR, C,  
SL, SR and LFE), DTS-ES Extended Surround also  
offers the SB (Surround Back) channel for surround  
playback with a total of 6.1 channels. DTS-ES  
Extended Surround includes two signal formats  
with different surround signal recording methods,  
as DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1.  
HDCD® (High Definition Compatible Digital ®) is a  
patented process for delivering on Compact Disc  
the full richness and details of the original  
microphone feed.  
HDCD encoded CDs sound better because they  
are encoded with 20-bits of real musical  
information as compared to 16-bits for all other  
CDs.  
HDCD overcomes the limitation of the 16-bit CD  
format by using a sophisticated system to encode  
the additional four bits onto the CD while remaining  
completely compatible with the CD format.  
When listening to HDCD recordings, you hear  
more dynamic range, a focused 3-D sound stage,  
and extremely natural vocal and musical timbre.  
With HDCD, you get the body, depth and emotion  
of the original performance not a flat, digital  
imitation.  
Dolby Digital identifies the use of Dolby Digital  
audio coding for such consumer formats as DVD  
and DTV. As with film sound, Dolby Digital can  
provide up to five full-range channels for left,  
center, and right screen channels, independent left  
and right surround channels, and a sixth (.1)  
channel for low-frequency effects.  
The Dolby Headphone technology provides a  
surround sound listening experience over headphones.  
When listening to multichannel content such as  
DVD movies over headphones, the listening  
experience is fundamentally different than  
listening to speakers. Since the headphone  
speaker drivers are covering the pinna of the ear,  
the listening experience differs greatly from  
traditional speaker playback. Dolby utilizes  
patented headphone perspective curves to solve  
this problem and provides a non-fatiguing,  
immersive, home theater listening experience.  
Dolby Headphone also delivers exceptional 3D  
audio from stereo material.  
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is an improved matrix  
decoding technology that provides better spatiality  
and directionality on Dolby Surround program  
material; provides a convincing three-dimensional  
soundfield on conventional stereo music  
recordings; and is ideally suited to bring the  
surround experience to automotive sound. While  
conventional surround programming is fully  
compatible with Dolby Surround Pro Logic II  
decoders, soundtracks will be able to be encoded  
specifically to take full advantage of Pro Logic II  
playback, including separate left and right surround  
channels. (Such material is also compatible with  
conventional Pro Logic decoders.)  
DTS, DTS-ES and Neo:6are trademarks of  
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, and the double-  
D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
The stereo CD is a 16-bit medium with sampling at  
44.1 kHz. Professional audio has been 20- or 24-  
bit for some time, and there is increasing interest in  
higher sampling rates both for recording and for  
delivery into the home. Greater bit depths provide  
extended dynamic range. Higher sampling rates  
allow wider frequency response and the use of  
anti-alias and reconstruction filters with more  
favorable aural characteristics.  
HDCD system manufactured under license from  
Microsoft. This product is covered by one or more  
of the following: In the United States 5,479,168  
5,638,074 5,640,161 5,808,574 5,838,274  
5,854,600 5,864,311 5,872,531 and in Australia  
669,114 with other patents pending.  
Dolby Digital EX creates six full-bandwidth output  
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done  
using a matrix decoder that derives three surround  
channels from the two in the original recording.  
For best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used  
with movies soundtracks recorded with Dolby  
Digital Surround EX.  
Circle Surround II (CS-II) is a powerful and  
versatile multichannel technology. CS-II is  
designed to enable up to 6.1 multichannel surround  
sound playback from mono, stereo, CS encoded  
sources and other matrix encoded sources. In all  
cases the decoder extends it into 6 channels of  
surround audio and a LFE/subwoofer signal. The  
CS-II decoder creates a listening environment that  
places the listener insidemusic performances  
and dramatically improves both hi-fi audio  
conventional surround-encoded video material.  
CS-II provides composite stereo rear channels to  
greatly improve separation and image positioning–  
adding a heightened sense of realism to both audio  
and A/V productions.  
CS-II is packed with other useful feature like dialog  
clarity (SRS Dialog) for movies and cinema-like  
bass enrichment (TruBass). CS-II can enable the  
dialog to become clearer and more discernable in  
movies and it enables the bass frequencies  
contained in the original programming to more  
closely achieve low frequenciesovercoming the  
low frequency limitations of the speakers by full  
octave.  
DTS 96/24 allows for 5.1channel sound tracks to  
be encoded at a rate of 96kHz/24bits on DVD-  
Video titles.  
When DVD-video appeared, it became possible to  
deliver 24-bit, 96 kHz audio into the home, but only  
in two channels, and with serious limitations on  
picture. This capability has had little use.  
DVD-audio allows 96/24 in six channels, but a new  
player is needed, and only analog outputs are  
provided, necessitating the use of the D/A  
converters and analog electronics provided in the  
player.  
About Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology delivers a natural  
and immersing 7.1-channel listening experience to  
the home theater environment. A product of  
Dolby's expertise in surround sound and matrix  
decoding technologies, Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a  
complete surround sound solution that maximizes  
the entertainment experience from stereo as well  
as 5.1-channel encoded sources.  
DTS 96/24 offers the following:  
1. Sound quality transparent to the original 96/24  
master.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is fully compatible with Dolby  
Surround Pro Logic technology and can optimally  
decode the thousands of commercially available  
2. Full backward compatibility with all existing  
decoders. (Existing decoders will output a 48  
kHz signal)  
3. No new player required: DTS 96/24 can be  
carried on DVD-video, or in the video zone of  
DVD-audio, accessible to all DVD players.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The SR9600 incorporates the most advanced  
Digital Signal Processing circuitry, along with a  
192 kHz/24 bit D/A converter in each of the 7  
channels. Independent power supply circuits are  
incorporated for the FL display, as well as audio  
and video sections for maximum separation, clarity  
and dynamic range. Together with hand-selected  
customized components, all elements work in  
harmony to recreate the emotion, exactly as the  
artist intended.  
• i.LINK Transmission Formats  
• HDMI  
i.LINK is the generic name for the IEEE 1394 digital  
interface standard of the Institute of Electrical and  
Electronics Engineers. It covers the transmission of  
data such as digital sound and the operation of  
connected devices.  
Two i.Link transmission formats are MPEG-2TS,  
which is used in digital broadcasting, and DV, which is  
used by DVD recorders and for digital video.  
This receiver supports the i.LINK (Audio)format. Only  
components that support i.LINK (Audio) can be  
connected to the SR9600. i.LINK (Audio) makes it  
possible to digitally transmit multichannel audio from  
DVD-Audio and Super Audio CDs.  
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is an  
enhancement to the DVI (Digital Visual Interface)  
standard. It adds capabilities for digitally transmitting  
audio signals in addition to video signals. Where  
multiple cables were previously needed for audio/  
video, HDMI enables audio/video connection via a  
single cable.  
The HDMI jacks of this receiver support HDMI Ver.  
1.1. The multichannel signals of DVD-Audio can be  
transmitted as digital signals without conversion.  
FEATURES  
The SR9600 incorporates the latest generation of  
digital surround sound decoding technology such  
as Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital, DTS ES  
(Discrete 6.1 and Matrix 6.1), DTS Neo:6 (Cinema,  
Music), Dolby Pro-Logic II (Movie, Music and  
Game), Dolby Pro-Logic IIx (Movie, Music and  
Game), Circle Surround II (Cinema, Music and  
Mono).  
In addition, Marantz has focused on the future. By  
utilizing pre-out jacks, 7.1 direct inputs and a RS-232C  
communication port, the SR9600 is tomorrows  
technology, today!  
The SR9600 is designed and engineered with  
extensive feedback from custom installation  
experts, dealers and consumers. It features multi-  
room/multisource, assignable DC triggers, a RS-  
232C communication port, flasher input, IR  
receiver input, 4 emitter out heavy duty speaker  
binding posts and an extensive array of both  
analog and digital inputs/outputs. With 9  
assignable digital inputs, 4 component video  
inputs, SACD multichannel (7.1 channel) direct  
inputs, video convert system and a speaker B and  
OSD output versatility is taken to a stunning new  
level. Furthermore, the SR9600 can output the  
OSD information through the Y/C (S-video) and  
composite video outputs.  
Copyright Protection  
This receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital  
Content Protection). HDCP is copyright protection  
technology that consists of data encoding and other  
device authentication. Its purpose is to protect digital  
video content. Both this receiver and the connected  
component (such as a video player or monitor) must  
support HDCP. Before connecting a component to  
this receiver, refer to its instruction manual.  
This receiver also supports flow rate control. Using a  
high-precision crystal oscillator, this receiver can  
convert digital signals into analog signals without  
them being affected by jitter.  
• THX Ultra certified  
7 ch amplifiers have enough power for even the  
most difficult conditions found in large rooms.  
Enormous power reserves endow the system with  
substantial dynamic ability at high sound levels.  
140 watts to each of the seven main channels, the  
power amp section features an advanced,  
premium high- storage power supply capacitors,  
and fully discrete output stages housed in cast  
aluminum heat sinks .  
(i.LINK and the i.LINK logo  
Sony Corp.)  
are trademarks of  
Copyright Protection  
This receiver supports DTCP (Digital Transmission  
Content Protection). DTCP protects copyrights by  
authenticating and encoding data transmissions  
between digital components that use i.LINK. To play  
back DVD-Audio or Super Audio CDs using i.LINK,  
the connected device must support DTCP. Before  
connecting a component to this receiver, refer to its  
An easy-to-use, programmable, learning remote  
control allows full access to all of the operating  
functions and can be used for system operation as  
well.  
• Current feedback 7 ch amplifier  
Current feedback topology combines total operational  
stability with excellent frequency response, while  
requiring only minimal amounts of negative feedback.  
It offers excellent transient response and superb  
sonic transparency.  
instruction manual  
.
The new generation of Marantz Receivers is stylish  
and completely symmetrical. On the front panel of  
the SR9600, buttons are kept to a minimum. Source  
selectors and volume controls are intuitively placed.  
The SR9600 is here to perform in your unrivaled  
home entertainment setup.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AM loop antenna  
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           
×
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           
2
THX/THX Surround EX  
Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital, DTS ES  
(Discrete 6.1, Matrix 6.1, Neo:6)  
Dolby Headphone  
ACCESSORIES  
Remote control unit RC3200B  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (Movie, Music, Game)  
Circle Surround II (Cinema, Music, Mono)  
HDCD decording  
Bi-amp drive  
HDAM-SA2  
Source/Pure Direct mode  
9 bands x 7 ch GEQ  
8 ch level meter  
FM feeder antenna × 2  
DSD direct conversion  
DSD to PCM converter  
MRAC (Marantz Room Acoustic Calibration)  
Improved station name input method, 50 presets  
Auto adjust function for speaker distance settings  
(delay time)  
VOL  
CH  
S
OK  
Ex  
M
Assignable 2 HDMI inputs  
Assignable 2 i.LINK inputs  
Lip sync. control  
FM antenna adapter × 2  
2 Multiroom operation  
Dual AM/FM Tuner  
7 x 140 Watts (8 Ohms), discrete amplifiers  
High power current feedback circuitry  
Massive energy power supply, huge troidal core  
transformer, large ELCOs  
Microphone MC-10  
192 kHz/24 bit DAC for all 8 channels  
32 bit digital surround processing chipsets  
RS232C cable  
Large heavy duty speaker terminals for all channels  
Auto input signal detection  
Front optical AUX input  
(digital camera, portable DVD)  
Main electric volume with zero-cross detection  
and 0.5dB per step control  
AC cable  
Multiroom speaker  
Video off mode  
Setup menu via all video output  
(composite, S-video and component video)  
Video conversion system  
(composite video S-videocomponent video)  
Auto video selector  
Front AUX jack cover  
PPUUSSHH  
Video auto power on/off  
Two monitor outputs  
AA-size batteries × 3  
RS-232C terminal for future upgrade or system  
control  
Assignable 4 DC trigger outputs  
4 emitter outputs  
User guide  
Learning remote control  
Flasher input, IR receiver input  
Graphic display, 256 x 64 pixel  
Transmit/receive remote control system  
Copper plate chassis  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
u
MULTI SPEAKER button  
How to Attach the Front AUX Jack Cover  
FRONT PANEL  
Press this button to activate the Multiroom  
Speaker system. M-SP A/M-SP Bindicator will  
be illuminated in the display. (See page 61)  
U
P
DI  
G
ITAL  
!
e
!
!
q
w
r
t yu i o!  
! !  
S-V  
ID  
AU  
X
E
O
1
INP  
U
T
VIDEO  
@
@ !  
L
A
U
DIO  
R
i
GYRO TUNING dial  
PPUUSSH  
H
Rotate this dial to change the frequency or the preset  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR9600  
number of the tuner.  
VOLUME  
INPUT SELECTOR  
o
AUTO TUNE button  
Front AUX Jack Cover  
When this button is pressed and the GYRO TUNING  
dial is rotated, auto scan function of the tuner  
frequency starts.  
DOWN  
UP  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
DOWN  
TUNING  
UP  
BAND  
F/P  
!
PURE DIRECT button and indicator  
When this button is pressed once, SOURCE  
DIRECTappears on the FL display. If pressed again,  
PURE DIRECTappears. After 2 seconds, the FL  
display indication goes out.  
SURROUND  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
!
T-MODE (Tuner Mode) button  
MODE  
AUTO  
MULTI  
AUTO TUNE  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
Press this button to select the auto stereo mode or  
mono mode when the FM band is selected.  
The AUTOindicator lights in the auto stereo  
mode. (See page 58)  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
MRAC  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
In the source/pure direct mode, the tone control  
circuitry and bass management are bypassed.  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
MIC  
Notes:  
• The surround mode is automatically switched to  
AUTO when the pure direct function is turned on.  
!
BAND button  
Press this button to switch between FM and AM in  
• Additionally, speaker configurations are fixed  
automatically as follows.  
the tuner mode.  
Front SPKR = LARGE  
Center SPKR = LARGE  
Surround SPKR = LARGE  
Surround Back SPKR = LARGE  
Sub woofer = YES  
! !  
@ @@ @  
! @  
!
F/P (Frequency/Preset) button  
@
During reception of AM or FM, you can change the  
function of the GYRO TUNING dial for scanning  
frequencies or selecting preset stations by pressing  
this button.  
Notes:  
q
POWER switch and STANDBY indicator  
When this switch is pressed once, the unit turns ON  
and the display is illuminated. When pressed again,  
the unit turns OFF and the STANDBY indicator is  
illuminated.  
• When using headphones, the surround mode can  
be change to STEREO or Dolby Headphone using  
MENU and Cursor button.  
!
THX button and indicator  
• The surround mode returns to the previous setting  
as soon as the headphone plug is removed from  
the jack.  
Press this button to activate THX processing for  
the input source. The THXindicator is illuminated  
in the THX mode.  
!
CLEAR button  
Press this button to cancel the station-memory  
setting mode or preset scan tuning.  
(See page 59)  
w
INPUT SELECTOR knob (AUDIO/VIDEO)  
This knob is used to select the input source.  
Video selectors, such as DVD, LD, TV, DSS, VCR1,  
VCR2 and AUX1 select video and audio simultaneously.  
r
SURROUND MODE button  
!
7.1CH INPUT button  
You can select the surround mode by pressing this  
Press this button to select the output of an external  
!
MEMORY button  
Audio function sources such as TAPE, CD-R, CD,  
TUNER-1, TUNER-2 and AUX2 may be selected  
in conjunction with the video source.  
This feature (Sound Injection) combines sound  
from one source with a picture from another.  
Choose the video source first, then choose a  
different audio source to activate this function.  
,
button. (See page 49)  
multichannel player.  
Press this button to enter the tuner preset memory  
numbers or station names. (See page 59)  
t
AUTO (Auto Surround) button  
@
MENU button  
Press this button to select the AUTO Surround mode.  
When this mode is selected, the receiver determines  
the surround mode corresponding to a digital input  
signal automatically. (See page 49)  
Press this button to enter the OSD menu system.  
!
VOLUME control knob  
Adjusts the overall sound level. Turning the control  
clockwise increases the sound level.  
@
Cursor (  
,
,
,
)/ENTER button  
Press these buttons when operating the OSD menu  
e
HEADPHONE jack for stereo headphones  
system and tuner function.  
!
AUX1 INPUT jacks  
y
MULTI (Multiroom) button  
This jack may be used to listen to the SR9600s  
output through a pair of headphones. Be certain  
that the headphones have a standard 1/4stereo  
phono plug. Note that the main room speakers will  
automatically be turned off when the headphone  
jack is in use.  
These auxiliary audio/video input jacks accept the  
connections of a camcorder, portable DVD, video  
game system, etc. When not using these jacks,  
protect with the included jack covers.  
Press this button to activate the Multiroom system.  
ROOM A/ROOM Bindicator will be illuminated in  
the display. (See page 61)  
@
EXIT button  
Press this button to exit from the OSD menu system.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
This indicator flashes if the input signal cannot be  
@
DISPLAY button  
FL DISPLAY AND INDICATOR  
When this button is pressed, the FL display mode  
is changed as follows :  
Normal display Level meterAuto display  
off Display off Normal display.  
The display off indicator DISPis illuminated when  
Display off is selected.  
detected.  
f g  
h jk  
l ¡  
¡
¡
¡
¡
.
.
.
¡
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL/ANALOG input indicator  
MULTI A B SPK SPKR A B  
PEAK ATT  
i.LINK  
DIGITAL  
SLEEP V-OFF Re-EQ NIGHT HDMI  
DIGITAL  
This indicator is illuminated when a digital input  
has been selected.  
SURROUND  
¡
¡
Normal display  
d
s
DVD:AT-HDMI 2  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
@
MRAC button/MIC jack  
ANALOG  
Press this button to automatically measure speaker  
characteristics using the included microphone  
(MC-10). (See page 36)  
dB  
+18.0  
DOLBY DIGITAL EX  
This indicator is illuminated when an analog input  
source has been selected.  
SL  
SR  
¡
¡
a
¡
SIGNAL FORMAT and TUNER indicators  
@
SPEAKER A/B button  
DISP  
2 DIGITAL  
When the display is OFF  
Press this button to select speaker system A and/or B.  
This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital  
signal is input.  
EX  
@
INFRARED receiver window  
ANALOG  
¡
When operating  
the SR9600 as a tuner  
This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital  
This window receives infrared signals for the  
remote control unit.  
AUTO TUNED ST  
EX signal is input.  
dts  
This indicator is illuminated when a DTS signal is  
input.  
¡
TUNED ST  
@
INFRARED transmitter window  
ES  
This window transmits infrared signals for the  
remote control unit.  
This indicator is illuminated when a DTS ES signal  
is input.  
a
DISP (Display Off) indicator  
k
Re-EQ indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when the SR9600  
This indicator is illuminated in the Re-EQ mode.  
96/24  
display is turned off.  
This indicator is illuminated when a DTS 96/24  
signal is input.  
Opening and closing the front panel door  
When you want to use the controls behind the front  
panel door, open the door by gently pressing on  
the lower part of the panel. Keep the door closed  
when not using these controls.  
l
NIGHT mode indicator  
s
SURROUND mode / i.LINK indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when the SR9600 is in  
the Night mode, which reduces the dynamic range  
of digital program material at low volume levels.  
PCM  
This indicator is illuminated to show that the  
This indicator is illuminated when the input signal  
is PCM (pulse code modulation).  
HDCD  
surround mode is in use.  
It also displays i.LINK information.(See page 28)  
This indicator is illuminated when the input signal  
is from a HDCD.  
Sampling frequency  
This indicator displays the sampling frequency  
when a PCM or multi channel PCM signal is input.  
32, 44.1 and 48 kHz are not displayed.  
SA-CD  
This indicator is illuminated when the input signal  
is from a SACD.  
¡
PEAK indicator  
d
Main Information Display  
This indicator is a monitor for an analog audio input  
signal. If the selected analog audio input signal is  
greater than what the internal processor can hold,  
this is illuminated If this happens, you should press  
the ATT button on the remote control unit.  
(See page 12)  
This display shows messages relating to the  
status, input source, tuner, audio input mode or  
other aspects of units operation.  
f
SLEEP timer indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when the sleep timer  
function in the main room is in use.  
M-PCM  
¡
ATT (Attenuation) indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when the input signal  
is multi channel PCM.  
This indicator is illuminated when the attenuation  
function is active.  
AUTO  
g
Multiroom system indicator  
This indicator is illuminated when the tuners auto  
mode is in use.  
This indicator is illuminated when the multiroom  
system is active.  
¡
HDMI  
HDMI/i.LINK indicator  
TUNED  
This indicator is illuminated when a station is being  
received with sufficient signal strength to provide  
acceptable listening quality.  
ST (Stereo)  
This indicator is illuminated when the audio signal  
input from the HDMI jacks is being played back.  
i.LINK  
This indicator is illuminated when the audio signal  
input from the i.LINK connector is being played  
back.  
h
V (Video)-OFF mode indicator  
Caution:  
This indicator is illuminated when the Video off  
mode is selected.  
Be careful not to pinch your fingers between the  
door and the panel.  
This indicator is illuminated when an FM station is  
being received in stereo.  
j
SPKR (Speaker) A/B indicator  
This indicator displays which speaker system is  
active.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
¡
SIGNAL FORMAT indicators  
t
7.1 CHANNEL or AUX2 INPUT  
REAR PANEL  
2 SURROUND  
This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby  
Surround signal is input.  
By connecting a DVD Audio player, Super Audio  
CD multichannel player, or other components that  
has a multichannel port, you can play back the  
audio with 5.1 channel or 7.1 channel outputs.  
q w e t  
r
y
u
i
o !  
!
1
!
MATRIX  
This indicator is illuminated when a Matrix 6.1  
Surround signal is input.  
y
Preamp Outputs  
(L, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, C)  
DISCRETE  
7.1CH IN  
SBL  
MAIN IN  
SR SBL  
MULTI OUT  
A
L
SL  
C
L
R
SL  
SBR  
C
B
This indicator is illuminated when a Discrete ES +  
Discrete 6.1 Surround signal is input.  
DUAL MONO  
DIGITAL  
IN  
L
(
)
AUDIO  
FRONT  
LEFT  
A
A
B
B
Jacks for L (front left), R (front right), C (Center), SL  
(surround left), SR (surround right), SBL (surround  
back left) and SBR (surround back right).  
Use these jacks for connecting to external power  
amplifiers.  
CENTER  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R
S400  
SPEAKER C  
ON  
OFF  
SR  
SBR  
SW  
R
PRE OUT  
SW  
AUDIO  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
FRONT  
RIGHT  
(
)
AUX  
2
This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital or  
DTS dual mono signal is input.  
NO AUDIO  
This indicator is illuminated when the input signal  
is PCM NO AUDIO.  
/SPK.  
C
LEFT  
L
AUDIO  
R
S400  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
FRONT  
LEFT  
/SPK.  
C
IN TAPE OUT  
IN CD-R/MD OUT  
CD  
RIGHT  
DVD  
LD  
TV  
DSS  
VCR-1  
OUT  
VCR-2/DVD-R MONITOR OUT  
1
TUNER-1  
GND  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
2
AM  
FM(75  
)
FRONT  
RIGHT  
VIDEO  
MULTI OUT  
A
B
u
Main amplifier inputs  
(L, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, C)  
S-VIDEO  
TUNER-2  
GND  
SURR.  
LEFT  
AM  
FM(75  
)
VIDEO  
-
-
INPUT 2  
(DSS)  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
(DVD)  
1
C
B
CR  
/
Y
/
¡
ENCODED CHANNEL STATUS indicators  
P
OUTPUT-1  
B
PR  
HDMI  
Ver 1.1  
When the jumper plugs that link the preamp  
outputs with these inputs are removed, these jacks  
may be used to connect an external source to the  
internal amplifiers.  
SURR.  
RIGHT  
These indicators display the channels that are  
encoded with a digital input signal.  
-
1
(
)
-
(
)
-
3
(
)
-
4
(
)
INPUT  
DVD  
INPUT  
2
DSS  
INPUT  
VCR-1  
INPUT  
VCR-2/DVD-R  
CLASS 2 WIRING  
SWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS  
FRONT  
SURR BACK  
FRONT AND  
A
OR B, CENTER, SURR,  
@
:
:
MINIMUM  
MINIMUM  
6
8
OHMS  
OHMS  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
A
B
CB  
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
CR  
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
If the selected digital input signal is Dolby Digital  
5.1 ch or DTS 5.1 ch, L, C, R, SL, SRand  
LFEwill be illuminated.  
If the digital input signal is 2 channel PCM-audio,  
Land Rwill be displayed. If Dolby Digital 5.1 ch  
signal with a Surround EX flag or DTS-ES signal  
comes in, L, C, R, SL, S, SRand LFE”  
will be illuminated.  
OPT  
COAX  
OUTPUT-2  
PB  
P
R
P
B
P
R
P
B
P
R
P
B
PR  
UNSWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
IN  
MODEL NO. SR9600  
IR  
AC IN  
FLASHER RECEIVER  
IN  
IN  
Notes:  
OUT  
RC-5 MULTI RC  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
AC 120V 60HZ  
AC OUTLETS  
RS232C  
DC OUT  
EMITTER OUT  
When connecting equipment, remove the attached  
jumper plugs and store them carefully so as not to  
lose them.  
@
@ @ @ !! !  
!
!
Only remove the jumper plugs when required.  
After you finish using an main amp input jack,  
replace the jumper plug.  
@
! !  
When playing back a disk such as an SA-CD or  
DVD-Audio disk, the actual audio and display may  
not match with some DVD players.  
i
Subwoofer output  
q
DIGITAL INPUT (Dig. 1 - 8)/  
OUTPUT (coaxial, optical)  
e
VIDEO IN/OUT (DVD, LD, TV, DSS, VCR1,  
VCR2/DVD-R)  
Connect this jack to the line level input of a powered  
subwoofer.  
¡
VOLUME indicator  
The volume level is indicated as a bar graph and  
numerically in decibels.  
If an external subwoofer amplifier is used, connect  
this jack to the subwoofer amplifier input.  
If you are using two subwoofers, either powered or  
with a 2 channel subwoofer amplifier, connect a Y”  
connector to the subwoofer output jack and run one  
cable from it to each subwoofer amplifier.  
These are the digital audio inputs and outputs.  
There are 4 digital inputs with coaxial jacks, and 4  
with optical jacks.  
These are the video inputs and outputs.  
There are 6 video inputs, and 2 video outputs with  
both composite video and S-video jack for each.  
Connect VCRs, DVD players, and other video  
components to the video inputs.  
The inputs accept digital audio signals from a CD,  
LD, DVD, or other digital source component.  
For digital output, there is 1 coaxial output and 1  
optical output.  
The digital outputs can be connected to MD  
recorders, CD recorders, DAT decks, or other  
similar components.  
¡
HDMI  
HDMI / HDMI THR indicator  
The 2 video output channels can be used to connect  
VCRs for making recordings.  
This indicator is illuminated when HDMI AUDIO is  
set to ENABLEand an HDMI device is  
connected to the SR9600.  
o
Multiroom outputs (Audio L&R, Video)  
HDMI THR  
These are the audio and video output jacks for the  
multiroom A and B systems.  
Connect these jacks to optional audio power  
amplifiers or video display devices to listen and  
view the source selected by the multiroom A and B  
systems in a remote room.  
r
AUDIO IN/OUT (DVD, LD, TV, CD, DSS,  
VCR1, VCR2/DVD-R, TAPE, CD-R/MD, CD)  
This indicator is illuminated when HDMI AUDIO is  
set to THROUGHand an HDMI device is  
connected to the SR9600.(See page 44)  
These are the analog audio inputs and outputs.  
There are 9 audio inputs (6 of which are linked to  
video inputs) and 4 audio outputs (2 of which are  
linked to video outputs). The audio jacks are  
labeled for cassette tape decks, CD players, DVD  
players, etc. The audio inputs and outputs require  
RCA connectors.  
w
i.LINK connector  
Up to S400 (400 Mbps) i.LINK devices can be  
connected to this receiver.  
!
SPEAKER C switch  
Set to ON to connect a bi-amp to this receiver or set  
to OFF for normal speaker connection (surround  
back and multiroom speakers). (See page 27)  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
!
Speaker outputs (SURROUND BACK/  
MULTI SPEAKER/SPEAKER C)  
!
MONITOR OUT  
@
DC TRIGGER output  
These are the monitor outputs. Each one includes  
both composite video and S-video jacks. When  
connecting two video monitors or TVs, be aware  
that the OSD interface can be used with both  
MONITOR OUT connections.  
Connect a device that needs to be triggered by DC  
under certain conditions (screen, power strip, etc.)  
Use the OSD menu system to determine the conditions  
in which these jacks will be active. (See page 45)  
Two terminals are provided for the front left, and  
right speakers for multiroom or surround back.  
The terminals can be used to connect a third set of  
speakers by setting the SPEAKER C switch to ON.  
(See page 27)  
Note:  
This output voltage is for status control only. It is  
not sufficient for drive capability.  
!
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT/OUTPUT  
If your DVD player or other device has component  
video connectors, be sure to connect them to these  
connectors on the SR9600. The SR9600 has 4  
component video input connectors to obtain the  
color information (Y, C /P , C /P ) directly from the  
recorded DVD signal or other video component and  
2 component video output connectors to output it  
directly into the matrix decoder of the display  
device.  
By sending the pure DVD component video signal  
directly, the DVD signal forgoes the extra  
processing that normally would degrade the  
image. The result is vastly increased image  
quality, with incredibly life-like colors and crisp  
detail.  
!
Speaker output  
Seven terminals are provided for the front (A) left,  
front (A) right, front (B) left, front (B) right, front  
center, surround left and surround right speakers.  
@
RS232C  
The RS232C port is used in conjunction with an  
external controller to control the operation of the  
SR9600 using an external device.  
B
B
R
R
The RS232C port may also be used in the future to  
update the operating software of the SR9600 so  
that it will be able to support new digital audio  
formats and other feature as they are introduced.  
!
AC INLET  
Plug the supplied power cord into this AC INLET  
and then into the power outlet on the wall.  
The SR9600 can be powered by 120 V AC only.  
@
HDMI INPUT/OUTPUT  
!
AC OUTLETS  
Connect the AC power cables of components such as  
DVD and CD players to these outlets. SWITCHED  
and UNSWITCHED outlets are provided.  
This unit has 2 HDMI inputs and 1 HDMI output. The  
input function can be selected from the OSD menu  
system. (See page 24)  
The one marked SWITCHEDprovides power only  
when the SR9600 is turned on and is useful for  
components which you use every time you play  
your system.  
The one marked UNSWITCHEDis always live as  
long as the SR9600 is plugged into a live outlet.  
A component connected here may be left on  
permanently, or may be switched off with via its  
own power switch.  
!
MULTIROOM REMOTE IN/OUT  
IN: Connect to a multiroom remote control  
device, available from your Marantz dealer.  
OUT: Connect to a Marantz component equipped  
with remote control (RC-5) terminals in a  
multiroom configuration.  
!
REMOTE CONT. IN/OUT  
Caution:  
Connect to a Marantz component equipped with  
remote control (RC-5) terminals.  
In order to avoid potential issues, anything plugged  
into these outlets should be powered up before the  
SR9600 is turned on.  
@
IR RECEIVER IN  
The capacity of this AC outlet is 120 W. Do not  
connect devices that consume electricity more than  
the capacity of these AC outlets. If the total power  
consumption of the connected devices exceeds the  
capacity, the protection circuit shuts down the  
power supply.  
Connect to an external IR receiver.  
@
FLASHER IN (Flasher input terminal)  
These terminals are for controlling the unit from  
each room using a keypad, etc.  
!
FM antenna 1, 2 (75 ohms)  
@
EMITTER OUT  
Connect an external FM antenna with a coaxial  
cable, or a cable network FM source.  
The signals input to the IR RECEIVER IN terminals  
are output to this terminal. External devices can be  
controlled by connecting them to this terminal.  
AM antenna and ground 1, 2  
Connect the supplied AM loop antenna. Use the  
terminals marked AMand GND. The supplied  
AM loop antenna will provide good AM reception in  
most areas. Position the loop antenna until you  
hear the best reception.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTIONS ON BATTERIES  
• Use “AA” (R6P) batteries in this remote control  
unit.  
F
H
(Mute) button  
LOADING BATTERIES  
When you use RC3200B for the first time, you  
have to install the batteries.  
The RC3200B requires 3 AA batteries (3 x 1.5 V) to  
function.  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
RC3200B  
Press this button to mute the sound temporarily.  
• If the remote control unit does not operate from  
close to the main unit, replace the batteries with  
new ones, even if less then a year has passed.  
G
VOL (Volume) up and down buttons  
Press these buttons to raise and lower the SR9600’s  
volume level.  
Note:  
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS  
• The included battery is only for verifying  
operation. Replace it with a new battery as soon  
as possible.  
• The included batteries are for verifying functionality  
of the remote control unit. When replacing the  
batteries, either rechargeable or non-rechargeable  
batteries may be used.  
H
OK and cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right )  
buttons  
12  
11  
• When inserting the batteries, be careful to do so  
in the proper direction, following the marks in the  
remote control unit’s battery compartment.  
Press these buttons to navigate through the OSD  
menu system.  
(Refer to “ON SCREEN DISPLAY MENU SYSTEM”  
on page 30)  
1. Remove the back cover.  
- To prevent damage or battery fluid leakage:  
- Do not use a new battery with an old one.  
- Do not use two different types of batteries.  
- Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or  
dispose of batteries in flames.  
10  
9
I
Page up/down buttons  
Press these buttons to scroll up or down the contents  
of LCD touch screen.  
• Remove the batteries when not planning to use  
the remote control unit for a long period of time.  
• If the batteries should leak, carefully wipe off the  
fluid from the inside of the battery compartment,  
then insert new batteries.  
J
Backlight  
ˆ
button  
1
Press this button to turn on the backlight of the  
LCD touch screen.  
2. Insert the new batteries (AA type) with correct  
8
and  
polarity.  
VOL  
CH  
S
OK  
2
7
• When disposing of used batteries, please  
comply with governmental regulations or  
environmental public instruction’s rules that  
apply in your country or area.  
K
Serial port  
6
5
3
4
Ex  
M
Connect the RC3200B with your computer using  
an RS232C cable for future upgrades.  
L
LCD touch screen  
The LCD touch screen is divided into different  
sections:  
REMOTE-CONTROLLABLE RANGE  
The distance between the transmitter/receiver of  
the remote control unit and the infrared sensor of  
the SR9600 should be less than about 16.4 ft (5  
meters).  
If the transmitter/receiver is pointed away from the  
infrared sensor or if there is an obstacle between  
them, remote control may not be possible.  
A
Select buttons for navigation bar  
These buttons control the navigation bar in LCD  
touch screen. Each function may also be provided  
with an alphanumeric indicator visible in the  
navigation bar of LCD touch screen.  
wed Jun 01  
1/8 A/V Amp  
Source Select  
4:40pm  
3. Close until it clicks.  
In this area, you can  
see the device you are  
operating.  
B
CH (Channel) up and down buttons  
Press these buttons to select the SR9600 tuner  
presets or TV channels.  
Operate your device  
with these soft buttons.  
C
S (Status) button  
Press this button to see the SR9600 status on the  
LCD touch screen.  
60°  
Notes:  
D
M (Menu) button  
• Do not mix alkaline and manganese batteries.  
• Do not mix old and new batteries.  
Press this button to enter the OSD menu system.  
Approx.  
16.4 ft (5 m)  
Remote control unit  
(RC3200B)  
E
Ex (Exit) button  
Press this button to exit the OSD menu system.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THE BATTERY STATUS  
TURNING ON THE DISPLAY AND THE BACKLIGHT  
ACTIVATING THE RC3200B  
OPERATING DEVICES  
To operate devices on your RC3200B you have to  
switch to the Home screen.  
This screen displays the available devices such as  
TV, VCR, DVD, Amp, etc.  
The battery icon  
batteries.  
indicates the status of your  
RC3200Bs display can be activated in two different  
ways: Tap the LCD touch screen gently with your  
finger or a blunt, soft object like a pencil eraser.  
The display is activated.  
When the RC3200B is switched on for the first time  
or when it is reset, the Introduction screen appears  
for a few seconds. The RC3200B then automatically  
switches to the Home screen that displays all  
available devices on your RC3200B. You can return  
to this Home screen from within other screens by  
pressing the Home button.  
When the battery status is low, the low battery icon  
appears at the top of the LCD touch screen.  
You can still operate your devices, but you cannot  
adjust the settings, learn commands or record  
macros anymore.  
1. Press the Backlight (ˆ) button.  
The display and the backlight are activated.  
If the LCD touch screen stays blank or  
becomes black when turning on the display,  
read the next section CHANGING THE LCD  
CONTRASTto adjust the contrast of the LCD  
touch screen.  
ACTIVATING THE HOME SCREEN  
Press the Home button.  
The Home screen appears, showing the available  
devices on the RC3200B.  
PAGE 1/4  
wed Jun 01  
1/4  
4:40pm  
Home  
Notes:  
RC3200B has a timeout feature: the LCD touch  
screen and the backlight automatically turn off to  
save power.  
Refer to ADJUSTING THE SETTINGSon  
page 17 to adjust the timeout for the LCD and the  
backlight.  
PAGE 2/4  
CHANGING THE LCD CONTRAST  
SELECTING A DEVICE ON THE HOME SCREEN  
wed Jun 01  
2/4  
4:40pm  
Home  
Tap the soft button of the device you want to operate.  
The first page of the selected device appears.  
Use the page up and page down buttons to go to  
another page of the device.  
You can operate devices using the buttons on your  
RC3200B:  
Hold  
Soft buttons (touch screen buttons);  
Hard buttons.  
Press  
PAGE 3/4  
USING THE SOFT BUTTONS  
wed Jun 01  
3/4  
4:40pm  
1. Press and hold the Backlight (ˆ) button. The  
screen lights up.  
2. While still holding the Backlight (ˆ) button,  
press the page up button once to increase the  
LCD contrast one level.  
By tapping the soft buttons on the LCD touch screen  
you can send IR commands to the device you have  
selected.  
The name of the active device is indicated at the  
top of the LCD touch screen.  
Home  
Note:  
The LCD contrast is adjusted one level up. or  
press the page down button once to  
decrease the LCD contrast one level. The  
LCD contrast is adjusted one level down.  
3. Release the Backlight (ˆ) button when the  
contrast is satisfactory. The LCD contrast can  
be adjusted 16 levels.  
You can operate the soft buttons in the same way as  
you would operate hard buttons on a conventional  
remote control. If you keep the soft button pressed  
instead of tapping it, the RC3200B keeps sending  
the IR command.  
PAGE 4/4  
wed Jun 01  
4/4  
4:40pm  
Home  
Notes:  
To adjust the contrast multiple levels, you have  
press the page up or page down button multiple  
times.  
When you press and hold the page up or page  
down button, the LCD contrast will only change  
one level.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SURROUND MODE 1 (PAGE 2/8)  
SURROUND MODE 3 (PAGE 4/8)  
wed Jun 01  
MODE (PAGE 5/8)  
wed Jun 01  
A/V AMP  
4:40pm  
4:40pm  
To control the SR9600 from your RC3200B, you have  
to select the A/V AMP on Home screen.  
5/8 A/V Amp  
Mode  
wed Jun 01  
2/8 A/V Amp  
Surround Mode 1  
4:40pm  
4/8 A/V Amp  
Surround Mode 3  
SOURCE SELECT (PAGE 1/8)  
wed Jun 01  
1/8 A/V Amp  
Source Select  
4:40pm  
Display  
Dolby Surround  
2
AUTO,  
Stereo, M-Stereo,  
S-Direct, P-Direct,  
THX mode,  
2EX/dts ES ,  
Virtual, Mode  
These buttons are used to select the surround  
mode. (see page 49)  
This button is used to select the display mode for  
main display. (see page 56)  
PLIIx  
Video off  
PLIIx-movie, PLIIx-Game, PLIIx-music,  
2 Dolby Headphone  
This button is used to turn off or on the video signal  
outputs from the MONITOR OUT terminals. (see  
page 56)  
These buttons are used to select Dolby Surround  
mode. (see page 49)  
7.1 Input on and off  
These buttons are used to select 7.1 ch input  
source. (see page 57)  
Sleep  
This button is used to set the sleep timer. (see  
page 49)  
Circle Surround II  
DVD, TV, CD,  
VCR1, VCR2, DSS,  
CD-R, LD, Tape,  
AUX1, Tune1,  
AUX2, Tune2  
CSII-Cine, CSII-Mono, CSII-music  
These buttons are used to select SRS Circle  
Surround mode. (see page 49)  
SURROUND MODE 2 (PAGE 3/8)  
OSD  
This button is used to turn on the OSD menu system  
for general information.  
You can view the status of the SR9600.  
wed Jun 01  
3/8 A/V Amp  
Surround Mode 2  
4:40pm  
These buttons are used for selecting an input  
source. (see page 48)  
Night  
This button is used to set the night mode. (see page  
50)  
Input  
These buttons are used to change the input  
source.  
Re-EQ  
This button is used to activate the Cinema Re-  
EQ™. Press it again to deactivate. (see page 50)  
Power on and off  
These buttons are used to turn the SR9600 on or  
off.  
A/D  
This button is used to select the Auto digital input,  
fixed digital input or analog input. (see page 56)  
ATT  
This button is used to attenuate the analog input  
signals. (see page 55)  
THX  
Surr.EX, Ultra 2,  
Cine, Games, Music  
These buttons are used to select the THX mode.  
(see page 49)  
L-Sync  
This button is used to activate the LIP.SYNC  
control mode. (See page 50)  
DTS  
Audio  
dts Mode, dts ES,  
This button is used to set the audio to Dolby  
Digital, dts or bilingual broadcasts.  
MAIN SUB MAIN + SUB MAIN  
Neo6-Cine and Neo6-music  
These buttons are used to select the DTS mode.  
(see page 49)  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TONE ADJUST (PAGE 6/8)  
SPEAKER A/B (PAGE 7/8)  
MULTI ROOM A/B SOURCE (PAGE 2/6)  
MULTI ROOM A/B  
MULTI ROOM A/B (PAGE 1/6)  
wed Jun 01  
6/8  
4:40pm  
wed Jun 01  
7/8  
4:40pm  
wed Jun 01  
2/6 Multi room A  
MULTI-A : Source  
4:40pm  
wed Jun 01  
2/6 Multi room B  
MULTI-B : Source  
4:40pm  
A/V Amp  
Tone Adjust  
A/V Amp  
Speaker A/B  
wed Jun 01  
4:40pm  
wed Jun 01  
1/6 Multi room B  
MULTI-ROOM B  
4:40pm  
1/6 Multi room A  
MULTI-ROOM A  
Treble + and –  
These buttons are used to adjust the tone of high-  
frequency sound. (see page 49)  
Spk-A on and off  
These buttons are used to turn speakers A on and  
off.  
DVD, TV, CD,  
VCR1, DSS, CD-R,  
VCR2, LD, TAPE,  
AUX1, AUX2  
These buttons are used for selecting an input  
source.  
Power on and off  
These buttons are used to switch the unit to the  
multiroom mode.  
Bass + and –  
These buttons are used to adjust the tone of low-  
frequency sound. (see page 49)  
Spk-B on and off  
These buttons are used to turn speakers B on and  
off.  
Volume + and –  
These buttons are used to adjust the sound level in  
the multiroom system.  
Tuner 1 FM and AM  
These buttons are used to switch between the FM  
and AM mode of the tuner 1.  
Mute on and off  
These buttons are used to turn the mute on and off.  
Test tone  
Mute H  
This button is used to generate a test tone noise  
signal. You can check the balance of the output  
signal levels.  
If this button is pressed during normal operation,  
the test tone display of the OSD menu system  
appears on the display. (See page 39)  
Tuner 2 FM and AM  
These buttons are used to switch between the FM  
and AM mode of the tuner 2.  
This button is used to mute the sound in the  
multiroom system temporarily.  
DC TRIGGER (PAGE 8/8)  
wed Jun 01  
8/8 A/V Amp  
DC Trigger  
4:40pm  
Multi Spk On and Off  
These buttons are used to switch the unit to the  
multiroom speaker mode.  
Ch Sel.  
This button is used to change the test tone noise  
signal output channel.  
If this button is pressed during normal operation, a  
display for setting the output level for each channel  
appears on the display.  
Sleep  
This button is used to set the sleep timer in the  
multiroom system.  
Input  
This button is used to jump to the page 2/6 display.  
Ch Level + and –  
This button is used to adjust the output level of  
each channel.  
OSD  
This button is used to turn on the OSD menu  
system for general information.  
Note:  
DC trigger on and off (1,2,3,4)  
These buttons are used to turn the four DC trigger  
outputs on and off. Trigger control must first be set  
on the OSD menu system. (see page 45)  
See page 61 to detail of Multi Room system.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MULTI ROOM A/B TUNER 1 (PAGE 3/6)  
MULTI ROOM A/B TUNER 1 KEY (PAGE 4/6)  
MULTI ROOM A/B TUNER 2 (PAGE 5/6)  
MULTI ROOM A/B TUNER 2 KEY (PAGE 6/6)  
wed Jun 01  
4:40pm  
3/6 Multi room B  
MULTI-B : Tuner 1  
Tuner 1 FM and AM  
These buttons are used to switch between the FM  
and AM mode of the tuner 1.  
Tuner 1 FM and AM  
These buttons are used to switch between the FM  
and AM mode of the tuner 1.  
Tuner 2 FM and AM  
These buttons are used to switch between the FM  
and AM mode of the tuner 2.  
Tuner 2 FM and AM  
These buttons are used to switch between the FM  
and AM mode of the tuner 2.  
Tuning ( :up /  
These buttons are used to change the frequency.  
Preset ( :up / : down)  
These buttons are used to change the preset  
station.  
: down)  
Ten-digit keypad (0, 1 - 9)  
These buttons are used to change the preset  
station name or input a frequency directly.  
Tuning ( :up /  
These buttons are used to change the frequency.  
Preset ( :up / : down)  
These buttons are used to change the preset  
station.  
: down)  
Ten-digit keypad (0, 1 - 9)  
These buttons are used to change the preset  
station name or input a frequency directly.  
CLR (Clear)  
CLR (Clear)  
This button is used to cancel certain memory or  
programming operations.  
This button is used to cancel certain memory or  
programming operations.  
ST/Mono  
ST/Mono  
ST/M  
ST/M  
This button is used to set the FM tuning mode, auto  
stereo or mono.  
This button is used to set the FM tuning mode,  
auto stereo or mono.  
This button is used to set the FM tuning mode,  
auto stereo or mono.  
This button is used to set the FM tuning mode, auto  
stereo or mono.  
P-Scan (Preset Scan)  
This button is used to start scaning automatically  
through preset stations in the receiver's memory.  
P-Scan (Preset Scan)  
This button is used to start scaning automatically  
through preset stations in the receiver's memory.  
Frequency Direct  
This button is used to select the mode of frequency  
direct input.  
Frequency Direct  
This button is used to select the mode of frequency  
direct input.  
Frequency Direct  
Frequency Direct  
This button is used to jump to the page 4/6 display.  
This button is used to jump to the page 6/6 display.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TUNER 1/2 : KEY/RDS (PAGE 2/2)  
4. Press and hold the Mode button for 3 seconds.  
TUNER 1/2  
RECORDING MACROS  
The Mode screen appears.  
A macro allows you to send a sequence of  
commands using a single button. You can, for  
instance, switch on your TV, turn to a movie channel  
and prepare your VCR for recording by rewinding  
the videotape all from a single button on your  
RC3200B.  
TUNER 1/2 : MAIN (PAGE 1/2)  
wed Jun 01  
2/2 Tuner 2  
Tuner 2 : Key  
4:40pm  
wed Jun 01  
2/2 Tuner 1  
Tuner 1 : Key/RDS  
4:40pm  
wed Jun 01  
4:40pm  
wed Jun 01  
1/2 Tuner 2  
Tuner 2 : Main  
4:40pm  
1/2  
Tuner 1  
Tuner 1 : Main  
To record macros, the RC3200B has to be in the  
Macro mode.  
1. Set the RC3200B to the Use Mode. See  
WORKING WITH MODES”. (see page 17)  
2. Press the Home button.  
wed Jun 01  
4:40pm  
1/4  
Home  
Ten-digit keypad (0, 1 - 9)  
These buttons are used to change the preset  
station name or input a frequency directly.  
5. Tap the MACRO on the Mode screen.  
A message screen appears.  
AM/FM  
These buttons are used to switch between the the  
FM and AM mode of the tuner.  
Memo  
This button is used to enter the tuner's preset  
memory numbers and station names.  
The RC3200B is now in the Macro mode.  
Tuning ( :up /  
These buttons are used to change the frequency.  
Preset ( :up / : down)  
These buttons are used to change the preset  
station.  
: down)  
CLR (Clear)  
This button is used to cancel certain memory or  
programming operations.  
Frequency Direct  
This button is used to select the mode of frequency  
direct input.  
Stereo/Mono  
This button is used to set the FM tuning mode, auto  
stereo or mono.  
3. Tap the MACRO.  
The Macro screen appears.  
wed Jun 01  
4:40pm  
RDS Disp.  
(Europe model only)  
P-Scan (Preset Scan)  
This button is used to start scaning automatically  
through preset stations in the receiver's memory.  
1/2 -- MACRO --  
Macros 1  
RDS PTY  
(Europe model only)  
Info.  
This button is used to display a list of preset  
stations on the OSD menu system  
.
6. Tap Next.  
Power on and off  
These buttons are used to turn the SR9600 on or  
off.  
The device screen with Macro labels appears.  
wed Jun 01  
4:40pm  
2/2 -- MACRO --  
Macros 2  
Press the page up and page down buttons to  
go to other screens of the selected device.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MULTIROOM A STATUS  
To go to the Multiroom status screen, press Multi  
button.  
7. Tap the soft button you want to select as a 10. Tap the soft or hard buttons of the commands  
SHOW THE SR9600 STATUS ON THE  
RC3200B  
The RC3200B communication with the SR9600 is  
capable of two-way, It can display the status of the  
SR9600.  
macro.  
A message screen appears.  
11. Pyoreuswsathntetoparegceourdp. and page down buttons to  
go to different screens of the same device or  
press the Home button to go to the Home  
12. sTcoreaedndadgealainy.s and beeps to the macro, press  
the Extra button on the Home screen.  
The EXTRA screen appears.  
1/2 STATUS  
To go to the first page of status screen, press the S  
button.  
8. Tap Start.  
This status screen shows multiroom condition,  
volume level, sleep timer, video input ,and audio  
input in the multiroom location.  
The Home screen appears with the  
RECORDINGlabel at the top of the screen.  
The buttons you tap on this screen will not be  
recorded. From the Home screen you can go to  
the different devices or you can press the Extra  
button to go to the EXTRA screen to set delays  
and beeps.  
To exit from the status screen, press the RTN  
button.  
This status screen shows the power condition,  
volume level, sleep timer, video input ,and audio  
input in the main room.  
1) To add a delay, tap one of the delay buttons.  
By tapping several delay buttons, the  
duration of the delay will be increased.  
2) To add a beep, tap the beep.  
Note:  
This feature works only with Multiroom A.  
2/2 STATUS  
3) Press the Home button to go to the Home  
screen again.  
To go to the second page of status screen, press  
page up button.  
13. Press Stop button to stop recording.  
A message screen appears.  
9. Tap the soft button of the device you want to  
go to.  
The device screen appears.  
This status screen shows the surround mode,  
format and channel status of the input signal, in the  
main room.  
14. Press OK button to save the macro and return  
to the Mode screen.The existing command of  
the selected button is replaced by the macro.  
To return to the Mode screen without saving  
the macro, press Cancel button.  
15. STheet tbhuettRoCn3re2t0a0inBstiotsthpereUvisoeusmcoodmemtoatneds.t the  
recorded macro.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
The backlight cannot stay active longer than the  
LCD. If you increase the backlight timeout, the  
LCD timeout will automatically increase as well.  
Press +to increase or to decrease the time  
the backlight stays active.  
3. Select the desired mode from the Mode  
WORKING WITH MODES  
ADJUSTING THE SETTINGS  
The RC3200B settings can be adjusted in the  
Setup mode.  
screen.  
RC3200B starts up in the Use mode. This mode is  
for operating devices. For customizing the  
RC3200B (adjusting the settings, learning buttons  
or recording macros), you have to switch to the  
appropriate mode.  
Note:  
When you switch to another mode from the Home  
screen, you cannot choose the Learn mode and  
Macro mode. To switch to these modes you first  
have to go to the specific device you want to  
customize.  
1. Press and hold the Mode button for 3 seconds.  
The Mode screen appears.  
1. Tap +or once to adjust the timeout 1  
2. Tap the Setup on the Mode screen.  
The first Setup page appears.  
Note:  
second up or down.  
When switching between modes, you will always  
return to the last active screen.  
2. Press and hold +or to adjust the timeout  
in 10 second increments up or down.  
The RC3200B settings consist of 3 setup pages  
with several settings per page.  
Use the page up and page down buttons to  
navigate to the appropriate setup page.  
Note:  
The RC3200B can be put into 4 different modes.  
These modes are:  
Use mode: For operating your devices. See  
OPERATING DEVICEfor more  
details.  
When the settings for the LCD timeout and the  
backlight timeout are high, the battery lifetime  
may be reduced.  
FIRST SETUP PAGE  
Setup mode: For changing the RC3200B system  
settings. See ADJUSTING THE  
SETTEINGfor more details.  
Learn mode: For learning commands from other  
remote controls. See LEARNING  
COMMANDSfor more details.  
Macro mode: For recording macros. You can  
assign multiple commands to a  
single button. See RECORDING  
MACROSfor more details.  
On the first setup page you can adjust:  
Change the Beep Volume  
The beep volume setting adjusts or turns off the  
volume of all button and system beeps on the  
RC3200B. The beep volume levels are mute, soft,  
medium and loud.  
LCD (LCD timeout)  
Backlight (backlight timeout)  
Beep volume  
1. Press +to increase or to decrease the  
beep volume.  
SECOND SETUP PAGE  
Note:  
On the second setup page you can adjust:  
Learning commands and recording macros is only  
possible per device. This means that you first have  
to select a specific device to perform these actions.  
Date  
Time  
1. On the Home screen tap the soft button of the  
device you want to customize.  
The first page of the selected device appears.  
2. Press and hold the Mode button for 3 seconds.  
The Mode screen appears.  
Adjust the LCD timeout  
The LCD timeout indicates how long the LCD  
touch screen stays active before it turns off.  
The LCD will only time out when you don't touch  
any buttons.  
You can set the timeout between 1 second and  
120 seconds.  
Press +to increase or to decrease the time  
the LCD stays active.  
Adjust the Date  
You can set the year, the month and the day in the  
date settings.  
Press +to increase or to decrease the value  
for the year, month and day.  
1. Tap +or once to adjust the timeout 1  
second up or down.  
2. Press and hold +or to adjust the timeout  
in 10 second increments up or down.  
1. Tap +or once to adjust the year, month  
and day one value up or down.  
Adjust the backlight timeout  
2. Press and hold +or to adjust the values  
for the year and the month more rapidly. The  
value for the day settings will change in 5 day  
increments.  
The RC3200B will immediately reflect the date  
change at the top of the screen.  
The backlight setting indicates how long the  
backlight of the LCD touch screen and the buttons  
stay active.  
The backlight timeout can be set between 1  
second and 120 seconds.  
Note:  
You have to press and hold the Mode button for 3  
seconds to prevent accidental changes.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjust the Time  
CALIBRATE  
REVERT  
3. Calibration is successful.  
Calibrate the LCD touch screen if the position you  
touch on the screen does not match the intended  
display position.  
1. Tap +or once to adjust the time 1 minute  
Warning:  
up or down.  
When you revert the RC3200B, all customization  
is lost permanently. You lose all RC3200B  
settings, learned codes and recorded macros.  
2. Press and hold +or to adjust the time  
more rapidly. The time will increase or  
decrease in 30 minute increments.  
The RC3200B will immediately reflect the time  
change at the top of the screen.  
1. Tap the Calibrate.  
Calibrate  
A message screen appears that Touch the  
top left corner.  
Calibration  
By tapping the Revert, the RC3200B will be  
returned to the default configuration. Reverting to  
the original configuration restores the RC3200B to  
its initial state. You might have to revert when you  
notice that scrolling through pages is slowing  
down. This may occur if you have added a lot of  
commands to the RC3200B.  
succeeded  
THIRD SETUP PAGE  
RC3200B Information  
Calibrate  
1. Tap the Revert.  
Touch the  
A message screen appears, asking you to  
confirm or cancel the revert process.  
top left corner  
Calibrate  
Cancel  
Tap the + point.  
2. A message screen appear that Touch the  
This page contains information that may be  
important to the dealer in case of a defect.  
The following information is displayed on this  
screen:  
button right corner.  
Free memory (in percentage), which gives you  
an indication on how much memory is left to  
(further) customize the RC3200B.  
2. Press OK or Cancel.  
Touch the  
Boot version  
Application version  
Configuration file  
bottom right  
corner  
TO EXIT SETUP MODE  
1. Press the Mode button.  
The Mode screen appears.  
2. Tap the Mode you want to go to. The RC3200B  
switches to this mode. See also WORKING  
WITH MODE. (See page 17)  
Cancel  
Tap the + point.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THE LEARN SEQUENCE  
7. Press and hold the button on the existing  
remote control unit you want to learn to the  
RC3200B.  
LEARNING COMMANDS  
1. Set the RC3200B to the Use mode.  
See WORKING WITH MODES.  
2. Select the device, e.g. DVD, with the  
buttons you want to learn. The device  
screen appears.  
3. Press and hold the Mode button for 3  
seconds. The Mode screen appears.  
4. Tap Learn on the Mode screen.  
If an IR code or a brand is not in the database, you  
can program RC3200B commands by transmitting  
IR signals from your existing remote control units  
to the RC3200B's learning eye. To do this, place  
the RC3200B and the device's remote control unit  
on a flat surface, 1 - 4 inches (2.5 - 10 cm) apart.  
When the RC3200B receives an IR code:  
A confirmation beep will sound.  
The label changes from LEARNINGto  
OK. The learn sequence is successful.  
OK  
NO GOOD  
OK  
1/4  
DVD  
Main  
Top View  
Top View  
RC3200B  
DVD remote  
DVD remote  
control unit  
RC3200B  
control unit  
LEARN  
1/4  
DVD  
Main  
Side View  
Side View  
DVD remote  
DVD remote  
Done BWD FWD  
control unit  
control unit  
RC3200B  
RC3200B  
When the RC3200B does not receive an IR  
code within 5 seconds:  
Done BWD FWD  
An error beep will sound.  
1 - 4 inchs (2.5 - 10 cm)  
The RC3200B is now in the Learn mode.  
LEARNand the label of the selected  
device appear at the top of the LCD touch  
screen.  
The label changes from LEARNINGto  
FAILED. The learn sequence has failed.  
The RC3200B will return to the Learn mode.  
Return to step 5 of the learn sequence to  
relearn the button.  
To learn commands from other remote control  
units, RC3200B has to be in Learn mode.  
Switching to Learn mode is only possible from the  
Mode screen.  
5. Use, if necessary, the page up or page  
down button to go to the next button you  
want to learn.  
See WORKING WITH MODES. (See page 17)  
Tip:  
For each device, you can learn all soft and hard  
buttons on the RC3200B, except for:  
You do not have to wait for the OKor  
FAILEDto disappear. If you press another  
button (soft or hard), the RC3200B learn sequence  
immediately goes back to step 5.  
6. Press the soft or hard button you want to  
learn on the RC3200B.  
T h e L E A R N l a b e l c h a n g e s t o  
LEARNING, which means RC3200B is  
ready to receive commands from an existing  
remote control unit.  
The RC3200B will wait for 5 seconds to  
receive an IR code from another remote  
control unit.  
the BACKLIGHT button  
the page up and page down buttons  
the buttons to navigation bar  
the S button  
8. Go to other pages of the selected device with  
the page up and page down buttons.  
Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you have copied all  
the commands of the existing remote control.  
9. Press Done button when you have finished  
learning commands on the buttons of your  
choice.  
Note:  
When a hard button is pressed to learn, there is  
no onscreen feedback to indicate which button  
is pressed.  
The RC3200B returns to the Use mode. You  
can try out the new IR codes or select another  
device to learn.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MINIMUM SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS  
PC with a Pentium 166 MHz or higher processor  
Windows 95/98/ME/XP or NT 4.0/2000  
32 MB of RAM  
RC3200B SETUP  
If you want to personalize your RC3200B even  
more beyond its standard programming features,  
RC3200Setup is the tool to use.  
You can find more information and updates to the  
software at http://www.marantz.com.  
RC3200Setup is a visual editor for creating and  
configuring RC3200B Configuration Files (NCF)  
on your computer. An NCF is a file that is used to  
define the RC3200B behavior and appearance of  
the LCD touch screen.  
IMPORTANT NOTICES  
CLEANING RC3200B  
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean RC3200B.  
If the LCD touch screen of RC3200B is spoiled,  
clean it with a soft cloth moistened with a diluted  
window-cleaning solution.  
Do not use a corrosive detergent or an abrasive  
sponge.  
Take care not to scratch the LCD touch screen  
Use your finger to tap the LCD touch screen or use  
plastic-tipped pens intended for use with touch  
screens.  
Never use an actual pen, pencil or other sharp  
object on the LCD touch screen.  
16 MB of free hard disk space  
Free serial port  
Avoid the use of abundant water.  
Notes:  
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of the  
Microsoft Corporation of the U.S.A. and are  
registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
Protect the RC3200B from extreme temperatures  
Keep the RC3200B away from heaters and other  
heat sources.  
HOW TO RESET THE RC3200B  
Under normal circumstances, you will never have  
to reset the RC3200B.  
However, on rare occasions, if the RC3200B's  
touch screen freezes or if you notice unusual  
behavior, you need to perform a reset to get the  
RC3200B running again. All customized  
commands and devices are retained.  
Note:  
Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the  
U.S. and other countries.  
It is advised to make backup copies of your own  
configurations. This can be done with RC3200Setup.  
The RC3200B is not waterproof  
The RC3200B should not be exposed to rain or  
moisture.  
Do not store or use the RC3200B in any location  
that is extremely damp or wet.  
If you spill water on the RC3200B, take out the  
batteries and let the RC3200B dry for 48 hours  
before reinserting the batteries.  
With RC3200Setup you can:  
generate a Home screen;  
design the page layout and the appearance of  
buttons;  
1. Slide the battery cover off the back of the  
configure the behavior of the hard and soft buttons;  
RC3200B.  
access RC3200Setup's extended help system  
by pressing F1.  
If you spill other liquids like coffee on the  
RC3200B, clean it with distilled water. Make sure  
no water gets into the housing.  
You will see the Reset button in the battery  
compartment.  
save, duplicate and share NCFs, devices,  
buttons, bitmaps or codes with another  
RC3200B;  
2. Use an unfolded paperclip to carefully press  
the Reset button.  
The touch screen of RC3200B contains a glass  
element  
Do not drop the RC3200B or subject it to any strong  
impact.  
The RC3200B restarts and the Introduction  
screen appears. The RC3200B beeps twice to  
indicate it is ready for use.  
preview the NCF on the RC3200B emulator;  
download new configurations to your RC3200B  
using the included serial cable.  
Reset button  
1. Plug one end of the serial cable in the serial  
port on your computer.  
Replace batteries  
The RC3200B has a backup function to prevent  
some memory data such as learned RC codes,  
macros from being erased when the batteries are  
replaced.  
However, the setup page memory (LCD, lighting,  
date, etc.) will be cleared.  
2. Plug the other end of the serial cable into the  
serial port on the RC3200B.  
Note:  
When the RC3200B is connected to a PC, the  
battery lifetime may be reduced.  
Please reset these contents, after inserting new  
batteries.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Surround left and right speakers  
When the SR9600 is used in a surround setup, the  
preferred location for the surround speakers is on  
the side walls of the room, at or slightly behind the  
listening position.  
The center of the speaker should face into the  
room.  
CONNECTING SPEAKERS  
CONNECTIONS  
POWERED  
SUBWOOFER  
SPEAKER PLACEMENT  
SURROUND  
BACK  
RIGHT LEFT  
The ideal surround speaker setup for this unit is 8-  
speaker, using front left and right speakers, a  
center speaker, surround left and right speakers,  
surround back left and right speakers, and a  
subwoofer.  
For best results we recommend that all front  
speakers be of the same type, with identical or  
similar driver units. This will deliver smooth pans  
across the front sound stage as the action moves  
from side to side.  
Your center channel speaker is very important as  
over 80% of the dialog from a typical motion  
picture emanates from the center channel.  
It should possess similar sonic characteristics to  
the main speakers. Surround channel speakers  
need not be identical to the front channel speakers,  
but they should be of high quality.  
The surround speaker is useful for playback of  
Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES. One of the  
benefits of both Dolby Digital and DTS is that  
surround channels are discrete full range, while  
they were frequency-limited in earlier “Pro Logic”  
systems.  
FRONT A  
LEFT RIGHT  
FRONT B  
LEFT RIGHT  
or  
Surround back left and right speakers  
Surround back speakers are required when a full  
7.1-channel system is installed.  
Speakers should be placed on a rear wall, behind  
the listening position.  
CENTER  
POWER  
AMPLIFIER  
The center of the speaker should face into the  
INVERT  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
LEVEL  
BTL  
EXT. CONT. IN  
REMOTE CONT.  
MAIN IN  
SR SBL  
MULTI OUT  
B
MASTER SLAVE  
SBR  
C
A
MIN  
MAX  
VIDEO/  
+5~13V DC  
SYSTEM OUT  
OUT  
IN  
room.  
L
FRONT  
LEFT  
A
A
B
B
CENTER  
R
Subwoofer  
SPEAKER  
ON  
OFF  
C
SPEAKER SYSTEM  
PRE OUT  
SW  
AUDIO  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
FRONT  
RIGHT  
MINIMUM  
4
OHMS  
We recommend using a subwoofer to have maximum  
bass effect. Subwoofer bears only low frequency  
range so you can place it anywhere in the room.  
/SPK.  
C
LEFT  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
FRONT  
LEFT  
/SPK.  
C
RIGHT  
IN TAPE OUT  
IN CD-R/MD OUT  
CD  
VCR-2/DVD-R MONITOR OUT  
2
TUNER-1  
GND  
IN  
OUT  
1
AM  
FM(75  
)
FRONT  
RIGHT  
MULTI OUT  
A
B
HEIGHT OF THE SPEAKER UNITS  
TUNER-2  
GND  
SURR.  
LEFT  
AM  
FM(75  
)
VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
C
B
C
R
/
Y
/
P
OUTPUT
B
PR  
Front left and right speakers, and a center speaker  
Align the tweeters and mid-range drivers on the  
three front speakers at the same height, as best as  
possible.  
SURR.  
RIGHT  
-
(
)
-
(
)
VCR-2/DVD-R  
UT  
3
VCR-1  
INPUT  
4
CLASS 2 WIRING  
SWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
SPEAKERR SYSTEMS  
FRONT  
SURR BACK  
FRONT AND  
A
OR B, CENTER, SURR,  
:
:
MINIMUM  
MINIMUM  
6
8
OHMS  
OHMS  
A
B
C
B
C
R
C
B
CR  
/
/
/
Y
/
OUTP
P
B
P
R
P
B
PR  
UNSWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
IN  
MODEL NOR9600  
IR  
FLASHER RECEIVER  
IN IN  
AC IN  
PASSIVE  
OUT  
RC-5 MULTI RC  
Surround left and right speakers, and surroun  
back speaker  
d
SUBWOOFER  
AC 120V 60HZ  
AC OUTLETS  
Bass effects are an important part of home theater.  
For optimal enjoyment a subwoofer should be used  
as it is optimized for low frequency reproduction. If  
you have full range front speakers, however, they  
may be used in place of a subwoofer with proper  
setting of the switches in the menu system.  
Place the surround left, right and surround back  
speakers higher than your ears by about 2.3 - 3.3 ft  
(70cm–1m). Also, place the speakers at the same  
height, as best as possible.  
SPEAKER C  
ON  
OFF  
SURROUND  
RIGHT LEFT  
Subwoofer  
CONNECTING A SUBWOOFER  
Surround Left  
Use the PRE OUT SUBWOOFER jack to connect  
a powered subwoofer (the power amplifier is built  
in ). If your subwoofer is a passive type (the power  
amplifier is not built in), connect a monaural power  
amplifier to the PRE OUT SUBWOOFER jack and  
connect the subwoofer to the amplifier.  
2.3 3.3 ft. (70cm 1m)  
Front Left  
Surround Back  
Left  
Front Center  
0
°
Surround Back  
Right  
22  
°
1.  
2.  
CONNECTING SPEAKER WIRE  
150  
°
30  
°
1. Strip away approx. 3/8 inch (10 mm) of wire  
135  
°
Front Right  
Surround Right  
insulation.  
110  
°
3/8 inch  
(10 mm)  
90  
°
2. Twist the bared wire ends tight, to prevent  
short circuits.  
3. Loosen the knob by turning it counterclockwise.  
4. Insert the bare part of the wire into the hole  
inside each terminal.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Note:  
Front left and right speakers  
• Use magnetically-shielded speakers for front left,  
front right and center speakers when the speakers  
are installed near the TV CRT.  
We recommend setting the front left and right  
speakers 45-60 degrees from the listening position.  
Center speaker  
5. Tighten the knob by turning it clockwise to  
Align the front line of the center speaker with the  
front left and right speakers. Or, place the center  
speaker a little back from the line.  
secure the wire.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caution:  
CONNECTING AUDIO COMPONENTS  
Be sure to use speakers with the specified impedance  
as shown on the rear panel of the SR9600.  
CD RECORDER / MD DECK  
To prevent damage to circuitry, do not let the bare  
speaker wires touch  
TAPE DECK  
each other and do  
not let them touch  
any metal part of  
the SR9600.  
CD PLAYER  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OUT IN  
OUT IN  
DIGITAL DIGITAL  
INPUT OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
L
L
L
L
L
R
R
R
R
R
Do not touch the  
speaker terminals  
when the power is  
on. It may result in  
an electric shock.  
L
R
L
R
L
L
R
R
L
L
R
Do not connect more than one speaker cable to  
one speaker terminal. Doing so may damage the  
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
SR9600  
.
7.1CH IN  
SBL  
MAIN IN  
SR SBL  
MULTI OUT  
B
Note:  
L
SL  
C
L
R
SL  
SBR  
C
A
DIGITAL  
IN  
ANALOG AUDIO  
L
(
)
AUDIO  
CENTER  
Be sure to connect the positive and negative cables  
for the speaker properly. If they are misconnected,  
the signal phase will be reversed and the signal  
quality will be corrupted.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R
S400  
SPEAKER  
ON  
OFF  
C
SR  
SBR  
SW  
PRE OUT  
R
SW  
AUDIO  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
(
)
AUX  
2
/SPK.  
C
LEFT  
L
DIGITAL AUDIO  
AUDIO  
R
S400  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
(COAXIAL)  
/SPK.  
C
RIGHT  
IN TAPE OUT  
IN CD-R/MD OUT  
CCDD  
DVD  
LD  
TV  
DSS  
VCR-1  
OUT  
VCR-2/DVD-R MONITOR OUT  
2
TUNER-1  
GND  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
1
AM  
FM(7
VIDEO  
MULTI OUT  
A
B
DIGITAL AUDIO  
S-VIDEO  
TUNER-2  
GND  
(OPTICAL)  
AM  
FM(7
VIDEO  
-
INPUT  
(DVD)  
-
INPUT 2  
(DSS)  
OUTPUT  
1
CB  
CR  
/
Y
/
P
B
PR  
HDMI  
Ver 1.1  
OUTPUT-1  
-
1
(
)
-
(
)
-
(
)
-
(
)
VCR-2/DVD-R  
INPUT  
DVD  
INPUT  
2
DSS  
INPUT  
3
VCR-1  
INPUT  
4
CLASS 2
SWITCHED 1A 120W M
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
C
B
CR  
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
CR  
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
OPT  
COAX  
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
OUTPUT-2  
UNSWITCHED 1A 120W
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
IN  
MODEL NO. SR9600  
IR  
FLASHER RECEIVER  
IN IN  
OUT  
RC-5 MULTI RC  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
AC 120V 60HZ  
AC OUTLETS  
RS232C  
DC OUT  
EMITTER OUT  
The output audio signal from the TAPE OUT jack  
and the CD-R/MD OUT jack is the same signal which  
is currently selected.  
CONNECTING DIGITAL AUDIO COMPONENTS  
Notes:  
There is no Dolby Digital RF input jack. Use an  
There are 8 digital inputs, 4 coaxial jacks and 4  
optical jacks on the rear panel. You can use  
these jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS  
bitstream signals from a CD, DVD, or other  
digital source component.  
external RF demodulator Dolby Digital decoder  
when connecting the Dolby Digital RF output jack  
of the videodisc player to the digital input jack.  
Caution:  
Do not connect the SR9600 and other components  
to a power outlet until all connections between  
components have been completed.  
The digital signal jacks on this unit conform to the  
EIA standard. If you use a cable that does not  
conform to this standard, this unit may not  
function properly.  
There is one digital output coaxial jack and one  
optical output jack on the rear panel. These  
jacks can be connected to CD recorder, or MD  
deck inputs, respectively.  
Notes:  
Insert all plugs and connectors securely.  
Incomplete connections may make noise.  
Each type of audio jack works independently.  
Signals input through the digital and analog jacks  
are output through the corresponding digital and  
analog jacks, respectively.  
Refer to the instructions for each component to  
setup the digital audio format of a DVD player, or  
other digital source connected to digital input  
jacks.  
Be sure to connect the left and right channels  
properly.  
Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, and  
white connectors are for the L (left) channel.  
Use 75 ohm coaxial cables (for digital audio or  
video) for the DIG-1, 2, 3, 4 input jacks. Use  
fiberoptic cables (optical) for the DIG-5, 6, 7, 8  
input jacks.  
Be sure to connect inputs and outputs properly.  
Refer to the instructions for each component that  
is connected to the SR9600.  
Do not bind audio/video connection cables with  
power cords and speaker cables. This will result in  
a hum or other noise.  
You can designate the input for each set of  
digital input/output jacks according to your  
component. (see page 33)  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT JACKS  
There are 3 types of video jacks on the rear panel.  
CONNECTING VIDEO COMPONENTS  
VIDEO jack  
The video signal for the VIDEO jacks is the  
conventional composite video signal.  
S-VIDEO jack  
SATELLITE TUNER  
VIDEO PROJECTOR  
DVD PLAYER  
The video signal is separated into luminance (Y)  
and color (C) signals for the S-VIDEO jack. The S-  
VIDEO signals enable high-quality color  
reproduction. If your video component has an S-  
VIDEO output, we recommend to use it. Connect  
the S-VIDEO output jack on your video component  
to the S-VIDEO input jack on the SR9600.  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
S-VIDEO  
IN  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
AUDIO VIDEO  
OUT OUT  
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
DIGITAL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO  
Y
CB  
/ PB  
CR  
/ PR  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
Y
CB  
/PB  
C
R
/PR  
L
R
L
R
COMPONENT jack  
L
R
L
R
Make component video connections to a TV or  
monitor with component inputs to produce higher  
quality video images. Use a component video cable  
or 3 video cords to connect the COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT jacks on the SR9600 to the monitor.  
L
R
R
L
7.1CH IN  
SBL  
MAIN IN  
SR SBL  
MULTI OUT  
A
L
SL  
C
L
R
SL  
SBR  
C
B
Notes:  
7.1CH IN  
SBL  
MAIN IN  
SR SBL  
MULTI OUT  
A
L
SL  
C
L
R
SL  
SBR  
C
B
DIGITAL  
IN  
DIGITAL  
IN  
L
(
)
AUDIO  
L
(
)
AUDIO  
CENTER  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Be sure to connect the left and right audio channels  
properly.  
CENTER  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R
S400  
R
S400  
SPEAKER  
ON  
OFF  
C
SR  
SBR  
SW  
PRE OUT  
R
SW  
AUDIO  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
SPEAKER  
ON  
OFF  
C
SR  
SBR  
SW  
PRE OUT  
R
SW  
AUDIO  
(
)
AUX  
2
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
/SPK.  
C
(
)
AUX  
2
LEFT  
L
/SPK.  
C
LEFT  
L
Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, and  
white connectors are the for L (left) channel.  
AUDIO  
R
S400  
AUDIO  
R
S400  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
/SPK.  
C
RIGHT  
IN TAPE OUT  
IN CD-R/MD OUT  
CD  
/SPK.  
C
RIGHT  
IN TAPE OUT  
IN CD-R/MD OUT  
CD  
DVD  
LD  
TV  
DSS  
VCR-1  
OUT  
VCR-2/DVD-R MONITOR OUT  
1
TUNER-1  
GND  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
2
DVD  
LD  
TV  
DSS  
VCR-1  
OUT  
VCR-2/DVD-R MONITOR OUT  
2
TUNER-1  
GND  
AM  
FM(75  
Be sure to connect the inputs and outputs of the  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
1
AM  
FM(75  
)
VIDEO  
MULTI OUT  
B
VIDEO  
A
MULTI OUT  
A
video signals properly.  
B
S-VIDEO  
TUNER-2  
GND  
S-VIDEO  
TUNER-2  
GND  
AM  
FM(75  
VIDEO  
If you connect the S-VIDEO or component signal to  
the S-VIDEO or component jack on the SR9600, it is  
not necessary to connect the the VIDEO (composite)  
AM  
FM(75  
)
VIDEO  
-
INPUT  
(DVD)  
-
INPUT 2  
(DSS)  
OUTPUT  
1
C
B
C
R
/
Y
/
-
-
INPUT  
(DSS)  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
(DVD)  
1
2
P
OUTPUT-1  
B
PR  
HDMI  
Ver 1.1  
C
B
C
R
/
Y
/
P
OUTPUT-1  
B
PR  
HDMI  
Ver 1.1  
-
(
)
-
(
)
-
(
)
-
(
)
VCR-2/DVD-R  
INPUT  
1
DVD  
INPUT  
2
DSS  
INPUT  
3
VCR-1  
INPUT  
4
CLASS 2
-
(
)
-
(
)
-
(
)
-
4
(
)
INPUT  
1
DVD  
INPUT  
2
DSS  
INPUT  
3
VCR-1  
INPUT  
VCR-2/DVD-R  
CLASS 2 WIRIN
SWITCHED 1A 120W MA
SWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
jack. If you use both video inputs, the SR9600 gives  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
CR  
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
OPT  
COAX  
OUTPUT-2  
P
B
P
R
P
B
P
R
PB  
PR  
P
B
PR  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
CR  
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
OPT  
OUTPUT-2  
P
B
P
R
P
B
P
R
P
B
P
R
P
B
PR  
priority to the S-VIDEO signal.  
UNSWITCHED 1A 120W M
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
IN  
MODEL NO. SR9600  
UNSWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
IR  
FLASHER RECEIVER  
IN IN  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
IN  
MODEL NO. SR9600  
IR  
FLASHER RECEIVER  
IN IN  
COAX  
Each type of video jack works independently. Signals  
input to the VIDEO (composite) and S-VIDEO jacks  
or COMPONENT VIDEO are output to the  
corresponding VIDEO (composite) and S-VIDEO or  
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, respectively.  
OUT  
RC-5 MULTI RC  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OUT  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
AC 120V 60HZ  
AC OUTLETS  
RS232C  
DC OUT  
EMITTER OUT  
AC 120V 60HZ  
AC OUTLETS  
RS232C  
DC OUT  
EMITTER OUT  
RC-5 MULTI RC  
L
R
VIDEO  
L
R
R
L
VIDEO  
The SR9600 has the VIDEO-AUTO ON/OFF  
function to turn the video equipment on or off  
automatically, by sensing the incoming video  
signal from the VIDEO jacks.  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
L
R
You may need to setup the digital audio output  
format of your DVD player, or other digital source  
components. Refer to the instructions of the each  
component connected to the digital input jacks.  
ANALOG AUDIO  
ANALOG AUDIO  
L
R
L
R
AUDIO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
VIDEO S-VIDEO  
IN IN  
DIGITAL AUDIO  
(COAXIAL)  
DIGITAL AUDIO  
(COAXIAL)  
There is no Dolby Digital RF input jack. Use an  
external RF demodulator Dolby Digital decoder  
when connecting the Dolby Digital RF output jack  
of the videodisc player to the digital input jack.  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUT IN  
AUDIO AUDIO  
IN OUT  
L
R
OUT IN  
L
R
L
R
DIGITAL AUDIO  
(OPTICAL)  
The same video signal is output from the video  
monitor 1 and 2 jacks, therefore you may connect  
to either jack.  
TV  
VCR  
The same video signal is output from the  
component output 1 and 2 jacks, therefore you may  
connect to either jack.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVD PLAYER  
HDMI OUTPUT  
VIDEO PROJECTOR  
HDMI INPUT  
Disconnecting or connecting cables with the  
power on can damage the equipment. Turn the  
power off before disconnecting or connecting  
cables.  
HDMI JACK  
This unit has two HDMI inputs and one HDMI output.  
It can send digital video and audio signals from DVDs  
and other sources directly to a display. It minimizes  
signal degradation caused by analog conversion so  
that high quality images can be enjoyed.  
Select an input source from the OSD menu system.  
(See page 44)  
Some DVD-Audio disks disable downmixing.  
These types of disks are not played back correctly  
unless the left, center, right and surround left and  
right speakers, and subwoofer are connected.  
If a DVD player that does not support HDMI 1.1  
is connected to the SR9600, multi channel PCM  
playback is not possible even with DVD-Audio  
disks.  
Notes:  
When the HDMI output is connected to a display  
monitor that does not support HDCP, signals are  
not output. To view images in HDMI, it is  
necessary to connect to a display that supports  
HDCP.  
7.1CH IN  
SBL  
MAIN IN  
SR SBL  
MULTI OUT  
B
L
SL  
C
L
R
SL  
SBR  
C
A
If a DVD player or other device with DVI output  
is connected to the SR9600, a separate audio cable  
(i.Link, optical-digital, coaxial digital or analog)  
is needed for the audio signals. In this case, select  
the connected audio input as explained in 1-1  
FUNC INPUT SETUP. (See page 33)  
DIGITAL  
IN  
L
(
)
AUDIO  
S400  
FRONT  
LEFT  
A
A
B
B
CENTER  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R
SPEAKER C  
ON  
OFF  
SR  
SBR  
SW  
R
PRE OUT  
SW  
AUDIO  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
FRONT  
RIGHT  
(
)
2
AUX  
/SPK.  
C
LEFT  
L
There may be no image output if connected to a  
TV or display that is not compatible with the  
above format.  
AUDIO  
R
S400  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
FRONT  
LEFT  
/SPK.  
C
RIGHT  
IN TAPE OUT  
IN CD-R/MD OUT  
CD  
Multi channel PCM signals and audio signals of  
62 kHz or higher that are input from the HDMI  
jack are not output from the DIGITAL OUT jacks.  
DVD  
LD  
TV  
DSS  
VCR-1  
OUT  
VCR-2/DVD-R MONITOR OUT  
IN  
TUNER-1  
GND  
IN  
OUT  
1
2
AM  
FM(75Ω  
)
FRONT  
RIGHT  
VIDEO  
Refer to the instruction manual of the TV or  
display to be connected to the SR9600 for detailed  
information regarding the HDMI terminal.  
MULTI OUT  
A
B
S-VIDEO  
TUNER-2  
GND  
SURR.  
LEFT  
AM  
FM(75Ω  
)
VIDEO  
Depending on the quiality of the cable used, the  
HDMI signal may be affected by noise.  
-
INPUT  
(DVD)  
-
INPUT 2  
(DSS)  
OUTPUT  
1
C
B
CR  
/
Y
/
P
OUTPUT-1  
B
PR  
HDMI  
Ver 1.1  
SURR.  
RIGHT  
-
(
)
-
(
)
-
(
)
-
(
)
VCR-2/DVD-R  
INPUT  
1
DVD  
INPUT  
2
DSS  
INPUT  
3
VCR-1  
INPUT  
4
CLASS 2 WIRING  
* HDCP: High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection  
SWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS  
FRONT  
SURR BACK  
FRONT AND  
A
OR B, CENTER, SURR,  
:
:
MINIMUM  
MINIMUM  
6
8
OHMS  
OHMS  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
A
B
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
CR  
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
OPT  
COAX  
OUTPUT-2  
P
B
P
R
P
B
P
R
P
B
P
R
P
B
PR  
CONNECTING HDMI DEVICES  
UNSWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
IN  
MODEL NO. SR9600  
IR  
FLASHER RECEIVER  
IN IN  
AC IN  
An HDMI cable (sold separately) is used to connect  
the HDMI jack on the SR9600 with the HDMI jack on  
a DVD player, TV, projector or other component. To  
transmit multichannel audio via HDMI, the connected  
player must support multichannel audio transmission  
through its HDMI jack.  
OUT  
MULTI RC  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
AC 120V 60H  
AC OUTLETS  
Z
RS232C  
DC OUT  
EMITTER OUT  
RC  
-
5
HDMI video streaming is compatible with DVI in  
principle. Therefore, it is possible to connect to a TV  
or monitor that has a DVI terminal using an HDMI-DVI  
conversion cable or plug. When connecting to a DVI  
terminal, connect the audio signal separately.  
SATELLITE TUNER  
HDMI OUTPUT  
Notes:  
Some HDMI components can be controlled over  
the HDMI cable, but this receiver cannot control  
other components this way.  
When connected to a monitor (i.e., TV, projector,  
etc.) that does not support HDCP, video and audio  
are not output.  
DVI cables come with 24-pin and 29-pin plugs.  
This receiver supports 24-pin DVI-D cables; 29-  
pin DVI cables cannot connect to it.  
Some source devices such as DVD players do not  
support HDMI repeater operations like those of  
the SR9600. In such case, pictures are not  
properly projected on monitors such as TVs and  
projectors.  
When multiple components are connected to this  
receiver, turn power to unused components off to  
prevent interference between them.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADVANCED CONNECTION  
CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL JACKS  
DVD-AUDIO PLAYER  
5
AM  
GND  
FM(75  
)
FRONT  
RIGHT  
B
or  
VIDEO  
MULTI OUT  
A
B
6
7
8
SUPER AUDIO CD  
MULTICHANNEL PLAYER  
S-VIDEO  
TUNER-2  
GND  
SURR.  
LEFT  
POWER  
AMPLIFIER  
AM  
FM(75  
)
VIDEO  
-
(DVD)  
-
INPUT 2  
(DSS)  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
1
CENTER  
CENTER  
C
B
CR  
/
Y
/
P
OUTPUT-1  
B
PR  
HDMI  
Ver 1.1  
L
L
SURR.  
RIGHT  
-
(
)
-
(
)
-
(
)
-
(
)
VCR-2/DVD-R  
INPUT  
1
DVD  
INPUT  
2
DSS  
INPUT  
3
VCR-1  
INPUT  
4
CLASS 2 WIRING  
R
R
SWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS  
FRONT  
SURR BACK  
FRONT AND  
A
OR B, CENTER, SURR,  
SURR.  
BACK  
SUB  
:
:
MINIMUM  
MINIMUM  
6
8
OHMS  
OHMS  
FRONT SURR.  
FRONT SURR. SURR.  
BACK  
SUB  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
A
B
WOOFER  
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
CR  
/
WOOFER  
Y
Y
Y
Y
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
OPT  
COAX  
OUTPUT-2  
P
B
PR  
P
B
P
R
P
B
P
R
P
B
PR  
UNSWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
IN  
MODEL NO. SR9600  
IR  
FLASHER RECEIVER  
IN IN  
AC IN  
Subwoofer  
OUT  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
AC 120V 60H  
AC OUTLETS  
Z
RS232C  
DC OUT  
EMITTER OUT  
RC-5 MULTI RC  
IR RECEIVER  
2
1
Front  
Right  
Surround  
Right  
Front  
Left  
Surround  
Left  
Center  
RC OUT  
R
L
R
L
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
Surround Back Left  
Surround Back Right  
REMOTE  
REMOTE  
REMOTE  
MD DECK  
CD PLAYER  
CD RECORDER  
7.1CH IN  
SL SBL  
MAIN IN  
SR SBL  
MULTI OUT  
A
L
C
L
R
SL  
SBR  
C
B
CONTROL  
CONTROL  
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
IN  
L
(
)
AUDIO  
FRONT  
LEFT  
A
A
B
B
CENTER  
IN  
IN  
IN  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R
S400  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
SPEAKER  
ON  
OFF  
C
SR  
SBR  
SW  
PRE OUT  
R
SW  
AUDIO  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
FRONT  
RIGHT  
(
)
AUX  
2
/SPK.  
C
LEFT  
L
AUDIO  
R
S400  
EXTERNAL INTERNAL  
EXTERNAL INTERNAL  
EXTERNAL INTERNAL  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
FRONT  
LEFT  
/SPK.  
C
RIGHT  
IN TAPE OUT  
IN CD-R/MD OUT  
CD  
DVD  
LD  
TV  
DSS  
VCR-1  
OUT  
VCR-2/DVD-R MONITOR OUT  
IN  
TUNER-1  
GND  
IN  
OUT  
1
2
AM  
FM(75  
)
FRONT  
RIGHT  
VIDEO  
MULTI OUT  
A
B
S-VIDEO  
TUNER-2  
GND  
SURR.  
LEFT  
AM  
FM(75  
)
VIDEO  
-
INPUT  
(DVD)  
-
INPUT 2  
(DSS)  
OUTPUT  
1
C
B
CR  
/
Y
/
P
OUTPUT-1  
B
PR  
HDMI  
Ver 1.1  
SURR.  
RIGHT  
q
w
-
(
)
-
(
)
-
(
)
-
(
)
INPUT  
1
DVD  
INPUT  
2
DSS  
INPUT  
3
VCR-1  
INPUT  
4
VCR-2/DVD-R  
CLASS 2 WIRING  
SWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS  
FRONT  
SURR BACK  
FRONT AND  
A
OR B, CENTER, SURR,  
You can control other Marantz products through  
the SR9600 with the remote control by connecting  
the REMOTE CONTROL terminals on each unit.  
The signal transmitted from the remote control is  
received by the remote sensor on the SR9600,  
then the signal is sent to the connected device  
through this terminal. Therefore you need to aim  
the remote control only at the SR9600. Also, if a  
Marantz power amplifier (some models excluded)  
is connected to one of these terminals, the power  
amplifiers power switch is synchronized with this  
units power switch.  
Whenever external infrared sensors or similar  
devices are connected to the RC-5 IN jack on the  
SR9600, be sure to always disable operation of the  
infrared sensor on the SR9600 by using the  
following procedure.  
:
:
MINIMUM  
MINIMUM  
6
8
OHMS  
OHMS  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
A
B
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
CR  
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
OPT  
COAX  
OUTPUT-2  
P
B
P
R
P
B
P
R
P
B
P
R
P
B
PR  
UNSWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
IN  
MODEL NO. SR9600  
IR  
FLASHER RECEIVER  
IN IN  
AC IN  
OUT  
RC-5 MULTI RC  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
AC 120V 60HZ  
AC OUTLETS  
RS232C  
DC OUT  
EMITTER OUT  
1. Hold down the MULTI button and the MENU  
button on the front panel at the same time for  
five seconds.  
CONNECTING MULTICHANNEL AUDIO SOURCE  
CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL POWER AMPLIFIER  
The PRE OUT jacks are for connecting external  
power amplifiers.  
Be sure to connect each speaker to the corresponding  
external power amplifier.  
2. The setting IR=ENABLEis shown on the FL  
The 7.1ch input jacks are for multichannel audio  
source such as a Super Audio CD multichannel  
player, DVD-audio player or external decoder.  
If you use these jacks, switch on the 7.1ch input  
and set the 7.1ch input level from the OSD menu  
system. (see page 33).  
display.  
3. Press the ENTER buttons to change this to  
IR=DISABLE.  
4. Press the OK/ENTER button for five seconds.  
The infrared sensor on the main unit is now  
disabled.  
Set the REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH on the other  
units, (not the SR9600) to EXT.(external) to use  
this feature.  
Note:  
Be sure to set to IR=ENABLEwhen external  
infrared sensors or similar devices are not  
connected. Otherwise, the SR9600 will be unable  
to receive remote control commands.  
5. To restore to the original setting, perform  
steps 1 to 4 and set to IR=ENABLE.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTING THE SUPPLIED ANTENNAS  
CONNECTING THE ANTENNA TERMINALS  
Connecting the supplied FM antenna  
The supplied FM antenna is for indoor use only.  
During use, extend the antenna and move it in  
various directions until the clearest signal is  
received.  
FM EXTERNAL  
ANTENNA  
AM EXTERNAL  
ANTENNA  
FM FEEDER ANTENNA  
AM LOOP ANTENNA  
Fix it with push pins or similar implements in the  
position that will cause the least amount of  
distortion.  
If you experience poor reception quality, an  
outdoor antenna may improve the quality.  
ANTENNA  
SPLITTER  
Connecting the supplied AM loop antenna  
The supplied AM loop antenna is for indoor use  
only.  
Set it in the direction and position it to where you  
receive the clearest sound. Put it as far away as  
possible from the unit, TVs, speaker cable, and  
power cord.  
7.1CH IN  
SBL  
MAIN IN  
MULTI OUT  
A
L
SL  
C
L
R
SL  
SR  
SBL  
SBR  
C
B
DIGITAL  
IN  
L
(
)
AUDIO  
FRONT  
LEFT  
A
A
B
B
CENTER  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R
S400  
SPEAKER  
ON  
OFF  
C
SR  
SBR  
SW  
PRE OUT  
R
SW  
AUDIO  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
FRONT  
RIGHT  
(
)
AUX  
2
/SPK.  
C
LEFT  
L
AUDIO  
R
S400  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
FRONT  
LEFT  
/SPK.  
C
RIGHT  
IN TAPE OUT  
IN CD-R/MD OUT  
CD  
TUNER-1  
TOR OUT  
If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor  
antenna may improve the quality.  
DVD  
LD  
TUNER-1  
GND  
AM  
GND  
2
AM  
FM(75)  
FRONT  
RIGHT  
VIDEO  
MULTI OUT  
A
B
S-VIDEO  
TUNER-2  
GND  
1. Press and hold down the lever on the AM antenna  
SURR.  
LEFT  
AM  
FM(75)  
C
B
C
R
/
/
P
OUTPUT-1  
B
PR  
terminal.  
HDMI  
Ver 1.1  
SURR.  
RIGHT  
TUNER-2  
I
CLASS 2 WIRING  
2. Insert the bare wire into the antenna terminal.  
3. Release the lever.  
AM  
GND  
SWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS  
FRONT  
SURR BACK  
FRONT AND  
A
OR B, CENTER, SURR,  
:
:
MINIMUM  
MINIMUM  
6
8
OHMS  
OHMS  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
A
B
Y
OPT  
COAX  
OUTPUT-2  
UNSWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
MODEL NO. SR9600  
AC IN  
Note:  
UT  
LTI RC  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
Connect the shielded grounding wire (black) to the  
AC 120V 60HZ  
AC OUTLETS  
RS232C  
AM antenna GND terminal.  
CONNECTING AN FM OUTDOOR ANTENNA  
ASSEMBLING THE AM LOOP ANTENNA  
4. Place the antenna on a stable surface.  
Notes:  
1. Release the vinyl tie and take out the connection  
Keep the antenna away from noise sources (neon  
signs, busy roads, etc.).  
line.  
Do not put the antenna close to power lines. Keep  
it well away from power lines, transformers, etc.  
To avoid the risk of lightning and electrical shock,  
grounding is necessary.  
CONNECTING THE ANTENNA WIRE TO THE  
ANTENNA CONVERTER  
Loosen the screws and attach the wire terminals,  
then tighten the screws with a screwdriver.  
CONNECTING AN AM OUTDOOR ANTENNA  
An outdoor antenna will be more effective if it is  
stretched horizontally above a window or outside.  
2. Bend the base part in the reverse direction.  
Notes:  
Do not remove the AM loop antenna.  
To avoid the risk of lightning and electrical shock,  
grounding is necessary.  
3. Insert the hook at the bottom of the loop part  
into the slot at the base part.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTING FOR SPEAKER C USE  
CONNECTING FOR MULTIROOM LISTENING  
Bi-amp connection  
A bi-amp connection is possible with speakers that  
have two sets of inputs (for treble and bass).  
This allows you to drive the treble and bass units  
with separate channel amps, which enables better  
sound quality. Connect the speakers as shown in  
the figure. Set the SPEAKER C switch on the rear  
panel to ON.  
MULTIROOM B  
MULTIROOM MULTIROOM  
LEFT  
SPEAKER  
RIGHT  
MONITOR  
SPEAKER  
Notes:  
If incorrectly connected, a protective circuit in the  
receiver will trip and set the receiver to standby.  
(The STANDBY indicator will flash.) If this  
occur, recheck the connections between the  
speakers and the receiver.  
R
L
(Multi room speaker)  
L
R
LEFT  
RIGHT  
SPEAKER  
VIDEO IN  
L
SPEAKER  
SPEAKER C  
ON  
OFF  
R
Turn the receiver power off before changing the  
setting of the SPEAKER C switch.  
FRONT  
If the speaker is fitted with a shorting bar, remove  
the shorting bar.  
7.1CH IN  
SBL  
MAIN IN  
MULTI OUT  
B
L
SL  
C
L
R
SL  
SR  
SBL  
SBR  
C
A
DIGITAL  
IN  
L
(
)
AUDIO  
FRONT  
LEFT  
A
A
B
B
CENTER  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R
S400  
SPEAKER  
ON  
OFF  
C
SR  
SBR  
SW  
R
PRE OUT  
SW  
AUDIO  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
FRONT  
RIGHT  
(
)
2
AUX  
/SPK.  
C
LEFT  
L
AUDIO  
R
S400  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
FRONT  
LEFT  
SPEAKER C  
ON  
OFF  
/SPK.  
C
RIGHT  
IN TAPE OUT  
IN CD-R/MD OUT  
CD  
DVD  
LD  
TV  
DSS  
VCR-1  
OUT  
VCR-2/DVD-R MONITOR OUT  
IN  
TUNER-1  
GND  
IN  
OUT  
1
2
AM  
FM(75  
)  
FRONT  
RIGHT  
Bass  
VIDEO  
MULTI OUT  
A
B
S-VIDEO  
TUNER-2  
GND  
SURR.  
LEFT  
AM  
FM(75)  
VIDEO  
-
1
-
INPUT 2  
(DSS)  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
(DVD)  
CB  
CR  
/
Y
/
P
OUTPUT-1  
B
PR  
HDMI  
Ver 1.1  
MULTI OUT  
B
SBR  
C
A
SURR.  
RIGHT  
-
(
)
-
(
)
-
(
)
-
4
(
)
INPUT  
1
DVD  
INPUT  
2
DSS  
INPUT  
3
VCR-1  
INPUT  
VCR-2/DVD-R  
CLASS 2 WIRING  
FRONT  
LEFT  
A
A
B
B
CENTER  
SWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS  
OR B, CENTER, SURR,  
FRONT  
SURR BACK  
FRONT AND  
A
R
:
:
MINIMUM  
MINIMUM  
6
8
OHMS  
OHMS  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
A
B
SPEAKER C  
ON  
OFF  
C
B
CR  
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
CR  
/
SW  
AUDIO  
Y
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
OPT  
COAX  
OUTPUT-2  
PB  
P
R
P
B
P
R
P
B
P
R
P
B
PR  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
FRONT  
RIGHT  
/SPK.  
C
UNSWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
LEFT  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
IN  
MODEL NO. SR9600  
IR  
FLASHER RECEIVER  
IN IN  
AC IN  
MULTIROOM A  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
FRONT  
LEFT  
OUT  
RC-5 MULTI RC  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
/SPK.  
C
RIGHT  
IN TAPE OUT  
ONITOR OUT  
IN CD-R/MD OUT  
CD  
AC 120V 60HZ  
AC OUTLETS  
RS232C  
DC OUT  
EMITTER OUT  
TUNER-1  
GND  
1
2
AM  
FM(75  
)
FRONT  
RIGHT  
MULTIROOM MULTIROOM  
MULTI OUT  
A
B
LEFT  
SPEAKER  
RIGHT  
SPEAKER  
TUNER-2  
GND  
SURR.  
LEFT  
AM  
FM(75  
)
VIDEO  
UT  
CB  
C
R
/
Y
/
PB  
PR  
OUTPUT-1  
R
L
SURR.  
RIGHT  
-
(
)
VCR-2/DVD-R  
NPUT  
4
CLASS 2 WIRING  
SWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
SPEAKERR SYSTEMS  
FRONT  
SURR BACK  
FRONT AND  
A
OR B, CENTER, SURR,  
MINIMUM OHMS  
MINIMUM OHMS  
:
:
6
8
A
B
CB  
CR  
/
Y
/
P
OUTPUT-2  
B
PR  
UNSWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
IN  
MODEL NO. SR9600  
AC IN  
OUT  
RC-5 MULTI RC  
R
L
AC 120V 60H  
AC OUTLETS  
Z
Treble  
Bass  
L
R
Treble  
RC IN FRONT  
MAIN AMP  
(For MULTIROOM)  
Treble  
Bass  
Treble  
Bass  
IR RECEIVER  
RIGHT  
SPEAKER  
LEFT  
SPEAKER  
RC OUT  
Note:  
VIDEO  
IN  
You can use surround back speaker terminals as  
MULTI SPK. terminals or SPEAKER C terminal  
when you are not using surround back speakers.  
MONITOR  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example connection :  
Up to 17 devices can be connected in a daisy  
chain.  
Notes:  
The i.LINK feature of the SR9600 supports only  
CONNECTING i.LINK COMPONENTS  
devices (digital broadcast receiver (MPEG-2 TS),  
digital video (DV), etc.) that support i.LINK  
(Audio). Do not connect unsupported devices  
because malfunctions can occur.  
The SR9600 connects to i.LINK components that  
support up to S400 (400 Mbps). Use a 4-pin i.LINK  
cable that supports S400 for i.LINK connections  
with this receiver.  
Video data cannot be transmitted via the i.LINK  
(Audio) supported by this receiver. To connect to a  
video component, connect the video signal  
separately. When connected to other Marantz  
products using i.LINK, the system can be operated  
over the i.LINK cable.  
When multiple i.LINK components are connected  
to the receiver, data can be transmitted through  
the other i.LINK components. The components do  
not have to be connected in a specific order to do  
this. (see page 34)  
i.LINK does not distinguish between input and  
output terminals in two-way communications. Input  
and output are switched according to the direction  
in which signals flow.  
The SR9600 can detect up to 15 components.  
i.LINK  
i.LINK  
i.LINK  
During playback of an i.LINK device, do not  
disconnect or connect the i.LINK cable of other  
devices. Also, do not connect new devices or turn  
the power on/off. This can cut off the sound.  
component  
component  
component  
Example connection :  
Some i.LINK devices cannot relay data while  
power is off or the device is on standby. See the  
instruction manual of the connected device.  
Up to 63 devices can be connected in a tree  
formation by branching. This kind of connection is  
possible with devices that have 3 or more i.LINK  
connectors.  
The SR9600 does not relay data in this state  
either.  
The maximum data transfer speed of an i.LINK  
device is labeled near to its i.LINK connector.  
This maximum data speed is standardized as S100  
(100 Mbps), S200 (200 Mbps) and S400 (400  
Mbps). The SR9600 has a maximum data transfer  
speed of S400, but if the connected device  
supports only S100 or S200, the actual data  
transfer may be slower than 400 Mbps.  
i.LINK  
i.LINK  
i.LINK  
component  
component  
component  
i.LINK (AUDIO)  
i.LINK  
component  
Mbps stands for mega bits per second. It  
expresses the quantity of data that can be sent in 1  
second. The SR9600 supports S400, therefore it  
sends 400 Mb of data every second.  
7.1CH IN  
SL SBL  
MAIN IN  
SR SBL  
MULTI OUT  
A
L
C
L
R
SL  
SBR  
C
B
Bad connection example:  
DIGITAL  
IN  
L
(
)
AUDIO  
FRONT  
LEFT  
A
A
B
B
CENTER  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R
S400  
SPEAKER  
ON  
OFF  
C
SR  
SBR  
SW  
PRE OUT  
R
SW  
AUDIO  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
i.LINK  
i.LINK  
FRONT  
RIGHT  
(
)
AUX  
2
/SPK.  
C
LEFT  
The i.LINK feature does not assure the connection  
and operation of all i.LINK devices. Whether data  
and control signals can be exchanged between  
i.LINK devices or not will depend on the  
functions of each device.  
L
component  
component  
AUDIO  
R
S400  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
FRONT  
LEFT  
/SPK.  
C
RIGHT  
IN TAPE OUT  
IN CD-R/MD OUT  
CD  
DVD  
LD  
TV  
DSS  
VCR-1  
OUT  
VCR-2/DVD-R MONITOR OUT  
1
TUNER-1  
GND  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
2
AM  
FM(75  
)
FRONT  
RIGHT  
VIDEO  
MULTI OUT  
B
A
i.LINK  
i.LINK  
i.LINK  
S-VIDEO  
TUNER-2  
GND  
SURR.  
LEFT  
AM  
FM(75  
)
VIDEO  
component  
component  
component  
Carefully check the configuration of the i.LINK  
connector before connecting an i.LINK cable.  
Forcing the cable into the connector in the wrong  
orientation can damage the connector.  
-
INPUT  
(DVD)  
-
INPUT 2  
(DSS)  
OUTPUT  
1
CB  
C
R
Y
/
/
PB  
PR  
HDMI  
Ver 1.1  
OUTPUT-1  
SURR.  
RIGHT  
-
1
(
)
-
(
)
-
(
)
-
4
(
)
INPUT  
DVD  
INPUT  
2
DSS  
INPUT  
3
VCR-1  
INPUT  
VCR-2/DVD-R  
CLASS 2 WIRING  
SWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS  
FRONT  
SURR BACK  
FRONT AND  
A
OR B, CENTER, SURR,  
:
:
MINIMUM  
MINIMUM  
6
8
OHMS  
OHMS  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
A
B
CB  
CR  
C
B
C
R
CB  
CR  
C
B
CR  
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
OPT  
COAX  
OUTPUT-2  
PB  
PR  
P
B
P
R
PB  
PR  
P
B
PR  
UNSWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
IN  
MODEL NO. SR9600  
IR  
FLASHER RECEIVER  
IN IN  
Do not connect devices in a loop as shown in the  
figure.  
Do not connect an i.LINK cable with power to the  
SR9600 on.  
AC IN  
OUT  
RC-5 MULTI RC  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
AC 120V 60HZ  
AC OUTLETS  
U
RS232C  
DC OUT  
EMITTER OUT  
Use an i.LINK cable that is no longer than 3.5 m  
and that supports S400.  
Some players require i.LINK setup. For details,  
see the instruction manual of the device.  
* Some devices may require you to make settings  
with the device connected to the SR9600 during  
the setup.  
Audio signals input from the i.LINK connector  
are not output from the DIGITAL OUT jacks.  
With some source devices, it takes time before  
sound is produced. This time is needed to detect  
the status of both the device and the SR9600. The  
amount of time will differ according to the  
connected player.  
Once the devices have been connected, activate  
power to the SR9600 and components, and make  
the settings as explained in i.LINK SETUP(see  
page 34). The i.LINK feature works as a temporary  
input source unless the settings are made. (See  
page 48)  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ERROR MESSAGES FOR CONNECTED i.LINK  
DEVICES  
CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT  
LOOP CONNECT”  
This message is displayed if the i.LINK device is  
connected in a loop. Connect the device so that  
the connection does not form a loop.  
7.1CH IN  
SL SBL  
MAIN IN  
SR SBL  
MULTI OUT  
B
L
C
L
R
SL  
SBR  
C
A
DIGITAL  
IN  
L
(
)
AUDIO  
S400  
FRONT  
LEFT  
A
A
B
B
CENTER  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R
SPEAKER  
ON  
OFF  
C
SR  
SBR  
SW  
PRE OUT  
R
SW  
AUDIO  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
NODE OVER”  
FRONT  
RIGHT  
(
)
AUX  
2
/SPK.  
C
LEFT  
L
This message is displayed if more than 63  
i.LINK devices are connected to the SR9600,  
including the SR9600. Limit connections to 63 a  
maximum devices including the SR9600.  
AUDIO  
R
S400  
SURR.BACK  
/MULTI SPK.  
FRONT  
LEFT  
/SPK.  
C
RIGHT  
IN TAPE OUT  
IN CD-R/MD OUT  
CD  
DVD  
LD  
TV  
DSS  
VCR-1  
OUT  
VCR-2/DVD-R MONITOR OUT  
IN  
TUNER-1  
GND  
IN  
OUT  
1
2
AM  
FM(75  
)
FRONT  
RIGHT  
VIDEO  
MULTI OUT  
A
B
S-VIDEO  
TUNER-2  
GND  
SURR.  
LEFT  
AM  
FM(75  
)
VIDEO  
-
INPUT  
(DVD)  
-
INPUT 2  
(DSS)  
OUTPUT  
1
CB  
C
R
Y
/
/
PB  
PR  
HOP OVER”  
HDMI  
Ver 1.1  
OUTPUT-1  
SURR.  
RIGHT  
This message is displayed if more than 17  
i.LINK devices are connected in a daisy chain.  
Keep daisy chain connections to a maximum 17  
devices.  
INPUT  
-
1
(
DVD  
)
INPUT  
-
2
(
DSS  
)
INPUT  
-
3
(
VCR-1  
)
INPUT  
-
4
(
)
VCR-2/DVD-R  
CLASS 2 WIRING  
SWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS  
FRONT  
SURR BACK  
FRONT AND  
A
OR B, CENTER, SURR,  
:
:
MINIMUM  
MINIMUM  
6
8
OHMS  
OHMS  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
A
B
CB  
CR  
C
B
C
R
CB  
CR  
C
B
CR  
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
/
Y
/
OPT  
COAX  
OUTPUT-2  
PB  
PR  
P
B
P
R
PB  
PR  
P
B
PR  
UNSWITCHED 1A 120W MAX  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
IN  
MODEL NO. SR9600  
IR  
AC IN  
FLASHER RECEIVER  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
RC-5 MULTI RC  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
AC 120V 60H  
AC OUTLETS  
Z
RS232C  
DC OUT  
EMITTER OUT  
BUS FULL”  
This message is displayed if too many devices  
are outputting signals on the i.LINK bus. Either  
shut off power or disconnect unused devices.  
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
CANNOT LINK”  
IR  
FLASHER RECEIVER  
IN IN  
This message is displayed if the SR9600 cannot  
connect to an i.LINK device or if an unconnected  
device is selected as the input source.  
Disconnect and reconnect the i.LINK cable, or  
shut power to the SR9600 off and turn it back on.  
4
RS232C  
DC OUT  
EMITTER OUT  
MESSAGES WHEN AN i.LINK DEVICE IS  
CONNECTED  
RS232C  
IR RECEIVER IN  
LINK CHECK”  
Connect an external control device or other device  
for servicing. (Use a straight cable for the  
connection.)  
This receiver can be operated by remote control  
without using the internal IR receiver, by  
connecting an external IR receiver.  
This message is displayed while the SR9600  
checks for changes in i.LINK device  
connections.  
GND  
+12V  
DC OUT (DC TRIGGER)  
NO SIGNAL”  
This message is displayed if a signal not  
supported by the SR9600 is input.  
External devices can be controlled from the  
SR9600 by connecting them to the DC OUT  
terminal (12 V).  
Signal  
EMITTER OUT  
An IR receiver is connected as shown above.  
Outputs the remote control signal input to the IR  
RECEIVER IN terminals. External components  
can be controlled by connecting them to the  
EMITTER OUT terminal.  
Caution:  
Wrongly connecting an IR receiver or connecting  
an IR receiver of the wrong voltage can damage  
the SR9600, therefore do not do this.  
FLASHER IN  
This receiver can be controlled by connecting a  
control box or other control device to this receiver.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RC3200B BUTTON CONTROL  
SETUP  
UP button  
After all components are connected, initial setup  
must be performed.  
ONSCREEN DISPLAY MENU SYSTEM  
The SR9600 incorporates an onscreen menu  
system, which makes various operations possible  
VOL  
CH  
OK  
LEFT button  
OK button  
RIGHT button  
by using the cursor ( ,  
,
,
) and OK/ENTER  
S
buttons on the remote control unit or on the front  
panel.  
Ex  
M
DOWN button  
Note:  
To view the onscreen displays, make certain you  
have connected the MONITOR OUT jack on the  
rear panel to the composite, S-Video or component  
video input of your TV or projector. (See page 23)  
1. Tap the A/V Amp on the remote control unit.  
(This step is not needed when operating the  
setup menus from the SR9600.)  
2. Press the M button on the remote control or  
press the MENU button on the front panel.  
The MAIN MENUof the OSD menu system  
is displayed.  
Ex (Exit) button  
M (Menu) button  
Press this button to exit the  
OSD menu system.  
Press this button to display the  
OSD menu system.  
There are 7 items in the MAIN MENU.  
3. Select the desired sub-menu with the or  
cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER  
button. The display will change to the selected  
sub-menu.  
SR9600 FRONT BUTTON CONTROL  
UP button  
ENTER button  
Notes:  
MULTI  
AUTO  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
AUTO TUNE  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
If you desire to adjust any sub-menu, you need to  
set it to UNLOCKED.  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
To lock sub-menus, set items 1-7 on the MAIN  
THX  
MRAC  
MENU to LOCKED.  
ENTER  
LEFT button  
RIGHT button  
MENU  
EXIT  
<Example>  
MIC  
(1) With 1. INPUT SETUPselected, press the  
cursor button to select UNLOCK.  
(2) Select LOCKEDwith the or cursor buttons.  
(3) Press the cursor button to enter the setting. A  
will appear to the right of LOCKED.  
EXIT button  
MENU button  
Press this button to display the  
OSD menu system.  
(4) 7. AUDIO STATUScannot be set to  
LOCKED.  
Press this button to exit the  
OSD menu system.  
DOWN button  
4. To exit from OSD menu system, press the  
EXIT button, or move the cursor to EXIT and  
press the OK/ENTER button.  
Note:  
Settings are entered with the ENTER button on  
the unit or the OK button on the remote control  
unit. When using the remote control unit, use the  
OK button as if it were the ENTER button.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
cursor to RETURNwith the and  
cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.  
,
,
MAIN MENU  
M A I N M E N U  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
.
I N P U T S E T U P  
. S P K R S E T U P  
. S U R R S E T U P  
. V I D E O S E T U P  
. P R E F E R E N C E  
. A C O U S T I C E Q .  
. A U D I O S T A T U S  
L O C K E D  
U N L O C K  
E X I T  
SUB MENU  
4
.
V
I
D E O S E T U P  
6
. A C O U S T I C E Q .  
1
.
I N P U T S E T U P  
I N P U T S E T U P  
V
V
I
I
D E O A U T O O N  
D E O C O L O R B A R  
E Q . M O D E O F F  
:
F U N C  
P R E S E T G . E Q 1 A D J  
P R E S E T G . E Q 2 A D J  
C H E C K A U T O 1  
7
i
.
.
1 C H  
I
N P U T S E T U P  
V
I
D E O C O N V E R T  
:
:
:
E N A B L E  
S A B L E  
E N A B L E  
A U T O  
O S D  
V
I
D E O S E L  
D
I
L
I
N K S E T U P  
I
N F O  
C H E C K A U T O 2  
F U N C T I O N R E N A M E  
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
See 4. VIDEO SETUP(  
p.43)  
See 1. INPUT SETUP(  
p.32)  
See 6. ACOUSTIC EQ(  
p.46)  
7
.
S T A T  
:
U
S
2
.
S P K R S E T U P  
5
I
. P R E F E R E N C E  
R O OM S E T U P  
S U R R . M O D E  
T
H X S U R R O U N D  
E X  
A U T O S E T U P  
M A N U A L S E T U P  
M U L T  
D C T R I G G E R S E T U P  
I
N P U T  
:
F
F
O R M A T  
D i  
:
t
1
2
3
4
g
i
a
l
T H X A U D  
B A S S P E A K L E V E L  
I
O
S E T U P  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
S T A N D B Y  
N G U A L  
:
:
N O RM A L  
M A N + S U B  
B
I
L
I
I
SL  
SR  
s
:
S P K R  
A
B
:
A
B
/
+
4
8
k
H
z
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
See 2. SPKR SETUP(  
p.35)  
See 5. PREFERENCE(  
p.44)  
See 7. AUDIO STATUS”  
p.47)  
(
3
.
S U R R S E T U P  
7 . S T A T U S  
S U R R . MOD E :  
T H X S U R R O U N D E X  
S U R R O U N D L E V E L  
P L  
C S  
x
M U S  
P A R A M E T E R  
I
C
P A R A M E T E R  
��  
OU T P U T :  
F O RM A T :  
D i  
g
i
t
a
l
N E O 6 P A R A M E T E R  
L
C
SW  
R
R E - E Q  
L F E L E V E L  
:
:
O F F  
1 0 d B  
-
SL  
SR  
F s  
:
SBL  
SBR  
4 8 k H z  
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
See 3. SURR SETUP(  
p.41)  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 INPUT SETUP  
This menu is for setting the matching the output of  
connected audio devices and the input jacks of this  
receiver.  
1
.
I
I
N P U T S E  
N P U T S E  
T
T
U P  
U P  
F
7
i
U N C  
.
.
1 C H  
N K S E T U P  
O N R E N A M E  
I
N P U T  
S
E T U P  
FUNC INPUT SETUP :  
L
I
1-1 FUNC INPUT SETUP(see page 33)  
F
U N C T  
I
7.1 CH INPUT SETUP :  
1-2 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP(see page 33)  
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
i.LINK SETUP :  
1-3 i.LINK SETUP(see page 34)  
p.34  
p.33  
p.34  
p.33  
F
F
U N C T  
I
O N R E N A M E  
D V D  
F
U N C  
I
N P U T  
S
G
E T U P  
HDMI COMP  
1
7
.
1 C H  
I
N P U T  
S E T U P  
1
i
.
L
P
I
I
N K S E T U  
P
1
FUNC RENAME :  
1-4 FUNCTION RENAME(see page 34)  
U N C : M O D E  
D
I
F
U N C T  
I
O N  
:
:
I
N P U T M O D E  
:
:
5
.
1 C H  
A U T O  
L A Y  
:
:
O F F  
O F F  
R E N A M E  
K
"
H
<
{
$
}
>
?
D V D  
L D  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
A U T  
A N A  
O
2
3
1
5
-
1
-
-
2
-
-
1
-
-
2
3
4
-
‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾�  
J K L M N O P Q R S T U V  
V
I
D E O -  
I
N
L A S T  
A U T  
O
N P U T S E  
L
A B C D E F G H  
I
T
V
D
I
G
.
I
1
2
1. Select 1. INPUT SETUPfrom the MAIN  
MENU with or cursor button, and press  
the OK/ENTER button.  
W X Y Z  
a
b
x
*
c
y
+
d
z
,
e
0
-
f
1
.
g
2
/
h
3
:
i
4
;
j
5
<
k
6
=
l
7
>
m n  
o
!
p q  
r
$
^
D S S  
V C R  
V C R  
A U X  
H DM  
s
% &  
t
u
í
v w  
(
}
8
9
"
#
]
1
2
1
i
.
1
)
? @ [  
A N A  
A U T  
4
F
_
{
|
S P A C E B A C K D E F A U L T  
O
-
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
R E T U R N  
N
E X T E X  
I
T
R E T U R N  
N
E X T E X  
I
T
R E T U R N  
N
E X T E X  
I
T
1
.
I N P U T S E T U P  
I N P U T S E T U P  
I N P U T S E T U P  
F U N C  
7
.
1 C H  
I
N P U T  
S E T U P  
2
F
U N C  
I
N P U T  
S
E T U P  
2
i
.
L
I
N K S E T  
U
P
2
F
T
C D  
C D  
U N C : M O D E  
D
I
G
HDMI COMP  
No  
MODEL NAME  
AUDIO FUNC  
LINE  
7
i
.
.
1 C H  
F
R O N T  
C E N T E R  
R O N T  
L
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
6
0
0
6
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
5
0
5
0
0
5
0
d B  
d B  
d B  
d B  
d B  
d B  
d B  
d B  
+
1
+
1
1
+
1
A P E  
:
:
:
:
A U T  
O
.
-
1
2
3
4
5
D V  
S A  
M V  
D V  
V P  
-
-
8
-
-
1
7 S  
3
S
1
0 S  
1
D V D  
C D  
***�  
*�  
*�  
*�  
*�  
*�  
*�  
*�  
*�  
-
-
L
I N K S E T U P  
F
R
+
-
R
D
I
G
7
7
6
-
1
0
6
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U B  
.
.
.
R
B
B
L
A N A  
A U T  
0
9
R
L
-
-
A U X  
2
O
9 A V  
1
-
-
-
F U N C T I O N R E N A M E  
R E T U R N  
2 S  
-
-
***�  
.
W
+
E X I T  
R E T U R N  
B A C K  
E X  
I
T
R E T U R N  
B A C K  
E X  
I
T
R E T U R N  
B A C K  
N
E X T E X  
I
T
2. Select the desired sub-menu with the or  
cursor buttons, and press the OK/ENTER  
button.  
i
.
L
I
N K S E T  
U
P
3
No  
MODEL NAME  
AUDIO FUNC  
LINE  
6
7
8
9
S R  
S A  
D V  
-
1
8
8
0 S  
1
-
-
-
-
***�  
9
9
-
0
0
0
0
C D  
-
R
-
V C R  
2
T
U
M H D  
D H 3  
5
5
0
0
0
0
***�  
***�  
10 H M  
-
-
R E T U R N  
B A C K  
N
E X T E X  
I
T
i
.
L
I
N K S E T  
U
P
4
No  
MODEL NAME  
AUDIO FUNC  
LINE  
11 S R  
12 N O N A M E  
13 D V D  
9
6
0
0
-
-
-
***�  
***�  
-
A
1
1
A U X  
1
14  
15  
R E T U R N  
B A C K  
E X  
I
T
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1 FUNC INPUT SETUP  
HDMI  
Assign the number of an HDMI input jack to the  
device.  
1-2 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP  
This menu is for adjusting the speaker levels for  
7.1-channel input sources.  
Here you will adjust the volume for each channel so  
that they are all heard by the listener at the same  
level.  
7. Select desired channel with the or cursor  
buttons.  
(ASSIGNABLE DIGITAL INPUT)  
8. Using the or cursor buttons, adjust the  
The 8 and F (Front) digital inputs can be assigned  
to a desired source.  
HDMI and COMPONENT inputs can be assigned  
to the preferred source.  
Use this menu to select which digital input jacks  
are to be assigned to which input source.  
volume level of each channel.  
COMP  
Assign the number of a component video input  
jack to the device.  
Move the cursor to RETURNwith the  
,
,
and  
cursor buttons, and press the OK/ENTER button  
to go to the 1.INPUT SETUP menu.  
1. Select 7.1 CH INPUT SETUPfrom the  
1.INPUT SETUP menu with the or cursor  
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.  
1. Select FUNC INPUT SETUPfrom the  
1.INPUT SETUP menu with the or cursor  
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.  
3. Press the OK/ENTER button.  
To return to the 7.1 Ch Input Setup 1 menu from the  
7.1 Ch Input Setup 2 menu, move the cursor to  
7
.
1 C H  
I N P U T M O D E  
I D E O - I N  
I N P U T  
S E T U P 1  
4. Select each mode setting and input terminal  
BACKwith the  
,
,
and cursor buttons and  
:
:
5
.
1 C H  
with the or cursor buttons.  
press the OK/ENTER button.  
F U N C  
I N P U T S E T U P  
1
V
L A S T  
F U N C : M O D E  
D
I G HDMI COMP  
5. Press the OK/ENTER button.  
Note:  
D V D  
L D  
: A U T O  
: A N A  
2
3
1
5
-
1
-
-
2
-
-
1
-
-
2
3
4
-
6. Repeat steps 2-5 until all items are set.  
7. After you complete this portion of the setup,  
The volume level can be set between -12 dB and  
+12 dB in 0.5 dB increments on all channels  
except the subwoofer (SUB W), which can be set  
from -18 dB to +12 dB in 0.5 dB increments.  
T V  
D S S  
V C R 1  
: D I G .  
1
2
: H DM  
I
:
i
.
1
R E T U R N  
N E X T E X I T  
V C R 2 : A N A  
A U X 1 : A U T O  
4
F
-
move the cursor to NEXTwith the  
,
,
2. Select INPUT MODEwith the or cursor  
and cursor buttons and then press the OK/  
ENTER button to go to the next page.  
R E T U R N  
N E X T E X I T  
buttons.  
2. Select a setting with the  
,
,
, and cursor  
F U N C  
F U N C : M O D E  
I N P U T S E T U P  
2
3. Select 7.1 CHor 5.1 CHwith the and  
buttons, and assign a mode and input jack  
(DIG, HDMI, COMP).  
D
I G HDMI COMP  
cursor buttons.  
T A P E : A U T O  
-
*�  
*�  
*�  
*�  
*�  
*�  
*�  
*�  
C D -  
C D  
R
: D I G .  
: A N A  
7
7
6
-
MODE  
4. Select VIDEO INwith the  
or  
cursor  
A U X 2 : A U T O  
AUTO:  
buttons.  
Select AUTO, for automatic detection of the  
digital input signal condition.  
If there is no digital signal, but there is an analog  
signal present, the analog signal will be played.  
"AUTO" is the initial setting of all input sources.  
5. Using the or cursor buttons, select the  
video input source to be played through the  
MONITOR OUT jack.  
R E T U R N  
B A C K  
E X I T  
The input source is switched by pressing the  
or cursor buttons as follows;  
LAST DVD LD TV DSS VCR1  
VCR2 AUX1 V-OFF LAST ↔...  
8. Repeat steps 2-5 until all items are set.  
DIG. X:  
After you complete this portion of the setup,  
Select DIG. X, when only a digital signal will be  
used.  
move the cursor to RETURNwith  
and cursor buttons and press the OK/  
ENTER button.  
,
,
ANA:  
Notes:  
Select ANAfor input sources for which no  
digital input jacks are used.  
When LASTis selected, the source is set to the  
source selected before the 7.1 ch input menu was  
activated.  
To return to the Func Input Setup 1 menu from  
the Func Input Setup 2 menu, move the cursor  
to "BACK" with the  
HDMI:  
Select HDMI1or HDMI2.  
When V-OFFis selected, no signal is emitted  
from MONITOR OUT jack.  
,
,
and  
cursor  
i.LINK:  
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.  
Select a number that can be set to i.LINK.  
i.LINKappears only when an i.LINK device  
has been assigned as an input source as  
explained in i.LINK SETUP. (See page 34)  
6. After you complete this portion of the setup,  
move the cursor to NEXTwith the  
,
,
and  
cursor buttons and press the OK/  
ENTER button to go to the next page.  
DIG  
7
.
1 C H  
I N P U T  
S E T U P 2  
8 and F(Front) digital inputs can be assigned to  
a desired source.  
Assign the number of a digital input jack to the  
device.  
F R O N T  
C E N T E R  
F R O N T  
S U R R . R  
S U R R . B  
S U R R . B  
L
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
0
1 0  
6
1 0  
1 0  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0 d B  
5 d B  
0 d B  
5 d B  
0 d B  
0 d B  
5 d B  
0 d B  
+
R
+
+
R
L
-
-
S U R R  
S U B  
.
W
L
+
6
1 2  
+
R E T U R N  
B A C K  
E X I T  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-3 i. LINK SETUP  
This menu sets communication between i.LINK-  
connected components and the SR9600.  
6. After you complete this portion of the setup, 9. When 6 or more i.LINK devices are registered  
1. Select FUNCTION RENAMEfrom the 1.  
INPUT SETUP menu with the or cursor  
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.  
move the cursor to NEXTwith the or  
cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER  
button to go to the next page.  
with this receiver, after you complete this  
portion of the setup, move the cursor to  
NEXTwith the  
,
,
and cursor buttons  
1. Select i.LINK SETUPfrom the 1.INPUT  
SETUP menu with the or cursor buttons  
and press the OK/ENTER button.  
and press the OK/ENTER button to go to the  
next page.  
F U N C T I O N R E N A M E  
i
.
L
I N K S E T U P  
2
No  
MODEL NAME  
AUDIO FUNC  
LINE  
F U N C T I O N  
R E N A M E  
:
:
D V D  
K
"
H <  
{
$ }  
>
?
1
2
3
4
5
D V - 1 0 S 1  
S A - 7 S 1  
M V 8 3 0 0  
D V - S 9 6 9 A V  
V P - 1 2 S 1  
D V D  
C D  
***�  
-
-
‾‾‾‾‾‾‾‾�  
J K L M N O P Q R S T U V  
10. Make settings on the i.LINK SETUP 3 and 4  
A B C D E F G H  
I
i
.
L
I N K S E T U P  
1
W X Y Z a b c d e f g  
h
i
j
k
l
m n o p q  
r
menus in the same way.  
-
-
-
-
-
s
% &  
_ {  
t
u v w x  
y
z
,
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 !  
; < = > ? @ [  
"
# $  
^
A U T O P L A Y  
:
:
O F F  
O F F  
***�  
í
|
(
}
)
* +  
-
.
/
:
]
To return to the i.LINK Setup 1 menu from the  
S P A C E B A C K D E F A U L T  
A U T O I N P U T S E L  
i.LINK Setup 2 menu, move the cursor to BACK”  
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
R E T U R N  
B A C K N E X T E X I T  
with the  
,
,
and cursor buttons and press the  
OK/ENTER button.  
2. Select FUNCTIONwith the or cursor  
This menu is for viewing the connected status of  
i.LINK components and assigning i.LINK  
component information to each one. i.LINK  
components are registered from No. 1 to No. 15 in  
the order in which they are detected by this receiver.  
buttons.  
R E T U R N  
N E X T E X I T  
REMOVING REGISTERED i.LINK COMPONENTS:  
A registered i.LINK component can be removed  
from the registered components list if -appears  
under LINE.  
3. Select an input source with the or cursor  
2. Select AUTO PLAYwith the or cursor  
buttons.  
button.  
Move the cursor to the FUNC item of the  
component indicated by “ ” under LINE with the  
or cursor buttons, and press the OK/ENTER  
button.  
The message DELETE? YES NOappears. Select  
YESwith the or cursor buttons and press the  
OK/ENTER button. This cancels registration and  
removes the component from the list. After a  
component has been removed from the list, other  
registered components move up to fill its spot.  
4. Select RENAMEwith the  
or  
cursor  
-
• MODEL NAME  
buttons.  
3. Select ONor OFFwith the or cursor  
The model name of the i.LINK component is  
automatically acquired from the component.  
(When a model name cannot be acquired, NO  
NAMEis displayed.) Model names longer than  
9 characters are cut off after the ninth character.  
buttons.  
5. Move the cursor to the character (1st to 10th)  
AUTO PLAY:  
to change with the or cursor buttons.  
Select whether or not to automatically play an  
i.LINK component when it is selected by this  
receiver.  
6. Move the cursor to the character list with the  
cursor button. (Move the cursor to the letter  
Ato begin with.)  
• LINE  
ON:  
Displays the connected status of the i.LINK  
component in real-time.  
The play command is sent to the i.LINK component.  
(With some i.LINK components, it is necessary  
to set auto play on the component itself.)  
Connected  
Disconnected  
Note:  
7. Select a character with the  
,
,
and  
-
OFF:  
Linkage to and operation of all i.LINK devices are  
not guaranteed. Not all components may work over  
the i.LINK interface. Operation has only been  
verified between Marantz components.  
cursor buttons.  
(Or power to the device is not on.)  
Play is manually controlled.  
• AUDIO  
8. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the  
Displays the audio support of i.LINK components.  
4. To select AUTO INPUT SEL, press or  
selected letter.  
cursor button.  
Audio supported  
The component does not support i.LINK  
-
1-4 FUNCTION RENAME  
Input sources can be registered under any name.  
This menu is for renaming input source.  
This menu is for renaming function name. Names  
can be up to 10 characters long, including spaces.  
(Characters are selected from those appearing on  
the display.) This name appears on the receiver's  
FL display and the OSD, but it does not appear in  
the OSD Setup menu.  
9. Repeat steps 5-8 until the new name is input.  
audio or not a source component.  
5. Select ONor OFFwith the or cursor  
• FUNC  
buttons.  
BACK:  
When "---" is displayed, the component can be  
assigned as an input source.  
AUTO INPUT SEL:  
Deletes the character left of the cursor in the  
RENAMEarea one character at a time.  
Select whether to automatically set the SR9600  
to the i.Link component when the component is  
set to play from the component itself.  
When "✽✽✽" is displayed, the device cannot be  
assigned as an input source.  
DEFAULT:  
Restores the name in the RENAMEarea to the  
name in the FUNCTIONarea.  
ON:  
The i.LINK component is selected when play  
operation is detected on the component.  
(With some i.LINK components, it is necessary  
to set auto play on the component itself.)  
7. Select the input MODEL NAME, press the  
SPACE:  
or  
cursor buttons.  
Inserts a space at the cursor point of the  
RENAMEarea.  
8. Assign an input source with the or cursor  
OFF:  
Move the cursor to "RETURN" with the  
,
,
and  
buttons.  
The SR9600 does not select the i.LINK  
component.  
(With some i.LINK components, it is necessary  
to set the component for auto i.LINK control on  
the component itself.)  
cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button  
to go to the 1. INPUT SETUP menu.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
After you complete this the portion of the setup,  
2 SPKR (SPEAKER) SETUP  
After you have installed the SR9600, connected all  
the components and determined the speaker  
layout, it is now time to perform the settings in the  
Speaker Setup menu for the optimum sound  
acoustics for your environment and speaker  
layout.  
press the OK/ENTER button. The cursor will  
move to RETURNand press the OK/ENTER  
button to go to the Sub-menu.  
2
.
S P K R S E  
T
U P  
Before you perform the following settings, it is  
important that you first determine the following  
characteristics:  
A U T  
M A N U A  
O
S E T U P  
S E T U P  
L
T
H X A U D  
I
O
S E T  
U
E
P
L
B A S S P E A K L E V  
AUTO SETUP:  
2-1 MRAC(see page 36)  
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
MANUAL SETUP:  
2-2 MANUAL SETUP(see page 37)  
THX AUDIO SETUP:  
p.36  
A U T  
p.37  
p.39  
T
S U B  
F
2-3 THX AUDIO SETUP(see page 39)  
T
H X A U D  
I
O
S
N
E T U P  
C OM P  
O
S E T  
U
P
K
1
M R A C  
T
2
D
I
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
S T A N C E  
S P E A K E R  
H X S P K R  
S
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
I
Z
N O  
Y E S  
L A R G E  
L A R G E  
L A R G E  
2 C H  
L A R G E  
1
E
U N  
F
I
f
t
BASS PEAK LEVEL:  
B O U N D A R Y G A  
I
.
S T A R T  
R O N T  
C E N T E R  
R O N T  
L
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
0
9
9
1
2
1
6
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
3
6
5
3
6
3
5
0
3
6
0
3
6
3
0
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
W
T
B
H X  
U
C
L T R A  
.
2
S U  
B
-
W
:
:
Y E S  
O N  
2-4 BASS PEAK LEVEL(see page 40)  
R O N T  
.
G
.
F
R
C E N T E R  
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U B  
.
.
.
.
W
R
B
B
L
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U R R  
L P F  
B A S S  
.
.
.
Note:  
These settings cannot be selected when THX  
ULTRA2 SUB-Whas been set to YESin the  
THX AUDIO SETUP menu  
A D V A N C E D S P K R A R R A Y  
S U R R S P K R  
A M B  
I
E N T N O  
I
S E  
:
:
:
**�  
**�  
**�  
R
L
B
B
.
B
S P E A K E R S C H E C  
P H A S E C H E C K  
S
X
I
Z
E
:
T O G E T H E R  
/
H P F  
0
0 H  
z
M
I
:
B O T H  
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
R E T U R N  
N
E X T E X  
I
T
R E T U R N  
B A C K  
N
E X T E X  
I
T
R E T U R N  
N
S
E X T E X  
I
T
T
T
.
p.40  
1. Select 2.SPKR SETUPfrom the MAIN  
MENU with or cursor buttons and press  
the OK/ENTER button.  
B A S S P E A K  
B A S S P E A K  
V O L UM E L E V E  
L
E S  
E V E  
L
A U T  
C H E C K  
O
!
S E T  
U
S
P
2
S P E A K E R  
T
D
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
I
T
f
A N C E  
t
M R A C  
3
F
R E Q  
.
A U T O 1  
!
:
P E A K E R  
U N  
I
M O D E  
C H  
F
S B  
L A T  
6
0
5
1
3
2
4
8
5
3
0
0
-
-
6
1
1
2
8
1
9
0
2
.
0
:
T
T
:
S T A R T  
d B  
F
R O N T  
L
Y E S  
N O N  
Y E S  
Y E S  
N O N  
N O N  
Y E S  
Y E S  
F
R O N T  
C E N T E R  
R O N T  
L
3
1
2
2
1
0
0
9
9
1
2
0
6
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
3
6
5
3
0
3
5
0
3
6
0
3
0
3
0
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
t
L
1
2
3
6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5
5
0
5
5
0
5
0
C E N T E R  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
+
1
+
+
-
+12  
L
:
+
1
8
.
0
F
R O N T  
R
F
R
5 +  
0
‖‖‖‖‖‖‖‖‖‖‖‖‖‖■‖‖‖‖‖�  
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U B  
.
.
.
.
W
R
B
B
L
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U B  
.
.
.
.
W
R
B
B
L
dB  
0
2
. S P K R S E T U P  
R
L
R
L
k
k
k
k
1
E N T E R  
-12  
-
-
1
1
A U T O S E T U P  
M A N U A L S E T U P  
63  
16kHz  
:
1
1
2
.
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
R E T U R N R E T R Y  
N
E X T E X  
I
T
R E T U R N  
B A C K  
N
E X T E X  
I
R E T U R N  
B A C K  
N
E X T E X I T  
T H X A U D I O S E T U P  
B A S S P E A K L E V E L  
A U T  
O
S E T  
U
L
I
P
N
3
S P E A K E R L E V E  
L
M R A C  
M O D E  
L
4
-
L E V E  
T
L
T
F
E S T M O D E  
R O N T  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
M A N U A  
L
F
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
L A  
C A N C E  
L
0
6
1
1
9
2
2
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
5
5
0
5
0
5
0
d B  
d B  
d B  
d B  
d B  
d B  
d B  
d B  
F
R O N T  
0
6
1
1
9
2
2
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
5
5
0
5
0
5
0
d B  
d B  
d B  
d B  
d B  
d B  
d B  
d B  
C E N T E R  
R O N T  
-
-
+
+
1
-
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
C E N T E R  
R O N T  
-
-
+
+
1
-
N OW A N A L Y Z  
S P E A K E R S  
G
!
!
F
R
F
R
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U B  
.
.
.
.
W
R
B
B
L
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U B  
.
.
.
.
W
R
B
B
L
2. Select the desired menu with the  
or  
S
I
Z
E
:
:
:
:
-
-
R
L
R
L
D
F
F
I
S T A N C E  
L A T M O D  
R O N T M O D  
**�  
**�  
**�  
+
-
+
-
cursor buttons, and press the OK/ENTER  
button.  
E
E
 �  
1
1
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
R E T U R N  
B A C K  
E X  
I
R E T U R N  
B A C K  
E X I T  
M R A C  
L
1
S
:
I
Z
L
E
A R G E  
F
R O N T  
C E N T E R  
R O N T  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
S M A  
L
L
F
R
L
L
A R G E  
A R G E  
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U R R  
S U B  
.
.
.
.
W
R
B
B
L
R
L
S M A  
S M A  
L
L
L
L
L
A R G E  
Y E S  
0 H  
L P F H P F  
8
z
/
R E T U R N  
N
E X T E X  
I
T
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-1 MRAC (Marantz Room Acoustic Calibration)  
How to operate  
Since settings are displayed on the monitor during  
setup, turn the monitor on.  
3. Either press the MRAC button on the front 5. Measurement results are displayed. Check  
panel of the SR9600, or select 2. SPKR  
SETUPon the MAIN MENU. Select AUTO  
SETUPwith the or cursor buttons and  
press the OK/ENTER button.  
the speaker system.  
Speaker settings that would be difficult to configure  
using manual setup can now be performed by  
automatically measuring speaker characteristics  
using the microphone.  
YES: Speakers connected  
NON: Speakers disconnected  
1. Connect the included microphone to the MIC  
jack on the SR9600.  
REV: The speaker cable is opposite in polarity  
(Check the speaker's cable connection.)  
ERR: The speaker layout is incorrect.  
(Check against cable connection diagrams.)  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR9600  
Measurement  
4. Select START on the AUTO SETUP 1 display  
and press the OK/ENTER button to start  
measurements.  
VOLUME  
INPUT SELECTOR  
During measurement, a test tone is output from the  
speakers, which is then measured and analyzed  
though the microphone. The item and the order in  
which they are measured are as follows:  
DOWN  
UP  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
DOWN  
TUNING  
UP  
BAND  
F/P  
SURROUND  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
MODE  
AUTO  
MULTI  
AUTO TUNE  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
A U T O S E T U P  
C H E C K S P E A K E R  
Y E S  
2
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
A U T O S E T U P  
1
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
MRAC  
!
!
STANDBY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX 1 INPUT  
S-VIDEO VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
MIC  
F R O N T  
L
:
S T A R T  
C E N T E R  
F R O N T  
S U R R . R  
S U R R . B  
S U R R . B  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
N O N  
Y E S  
Y E S  
N O N  
N O N  
Y E S  
Y E S  
R
AUTO SETUP 1  
AMBIENT NOISE: Ambient noise measurement  
SPEAKER CHECK: Speaker connected/not  
connected check  
R
L
A M B I E N T N O I S E  
S P E A K E R S C H E C K  
P H A S E C H E C K  
:
:
:
**�  
**�  
**�  
S U R R  
S U B  
.
W
L
PHASE CHECK: Speakers phase check  
2. Set the microphone at ear height in the actual  
listening position. Use a stand or tripod to  
position the microphone.  
R E T U R N R E T R Y N E X T E X I T  
R E T U R N  
N E X T E X I T  
AUTO SETUP 2  
Results from the measurements are checked.  
Measurement in progress examples  
Error example  
A U T O S E T U P  
1
A U T O S E T U P  
2
C A N C E L  
C H E C K S P E A K E R  
!
!
AUTO SETUP 3  
F R O N T  
C E N T E R  
F R O N T  
S U R R . R  
S U R R . B  
S U R R . B  
L
:
Y E S  
N O N  
Y E S  
N O N E R R  
Y E S E R R R E V  
Y E S E R R R E V  
N O N E R R  
R E V  
R E V  
N OW A N A L Y Z I N G  
!
!
SPEAKER SIZE: Speaker characteristics check  
SPEAKER DISTANCE: Distance from speaker  
(delay time) check  
FLAT MODE: Speaker frequency measurement.  
This measurement identifies the frequency required  
to compensate the sound to the flat level.  
FRONT MODE: Speaker frequency measurement.  
This measurement identifies the frequency required  
to match the front speaker characteristics.  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
R
A M B I E N T N O I S E  
S P E A K E R S C H E C K  
P H A S E C H E C K  
:
:
:
O K  
-
**�  
-
R
L
S U R R  
S U B  
.
W
L
Y E S  
R E T U R N  
N E X T E X I T  
R E T U R N R E T R Y  
E X I T  
START:  
Move the cursor to NEXTor RETRYwith the or  
cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.  
Press the OK/ENTER button. The indication  
changes to CANCELand processing starts.  
Notes:  
Remove any obstructions between the speakers  
and the microphone.  
Keep the room quiet during measurement.  
The test tone emitted during measurement is loud.  
Please be consideratie of neighboring homes and  
children.  
CANCEL (Available only during processing):  
Interrupt processing with the OK/ENTER button.  
The status prior to the start of Auto Setup 1 is  
restored.  
RETRY: Retries measurement from the beginning.  
NEXT: Advances to the Auto Setup 3 menu.  
(If there is an error, "NEXT" cannot be displayed.)  
6. Move the cursor to NEXTwith the  
,
,
Progress bar:  
Restarts from 0 each time processing ends for  
each item.  
and cursor buttons and press the OK/  
If using a powered subwoofer, set volume to  
medium level and the crossover frequency to the  
highest level.  
ENTER button. Measurement starts for the  
remaining items.  
During measurement, “  
--appears in the  
message area, otherwise ✽✽appears. When  
measurement ends successfully, OKis  
displayed.  
Step away from the listening position during  
measurement and operate the SR9600 with the  
remote control unit from outside the speaker path.  
7. When measurements are complete, FINISH!!”  
and CHECK RESULTare displayed.  
The MRAC feature is not available in the following  
modes.  
A U T O S E T U P  
C A N C E L  
3
- 7.1 Ch Input  
- Pure Direct  
- Source Direct  
- Dolby Headphone  
N OW A N A L Y Z I N G  
!
!
S P E A K E R S  
I Z E  
I S T A N C E  
L A T M O D E  
S
D
F
:
:
:
:
-
-
**�  
**�  
**�  
F R O N T M O D E  
 �  
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A U T O S E T U P  
3
2-2 MANUAL SETUP  
8. Once finished, disconnect the microphone  
14  
.
Move the cursor to NEXTwith the  
cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER  
button.  
,
,
,and  
from the SR9600.  
F
I N I S H  
!
!
1. Select 2. SPKR SETUPfrom the MAIN  
C H E C K R E S U L T  
MENU.  
9. When CHECK RESULTappears on the FL  
display, press the OK/ENTER button.  
The MRAC 1 Size menu displays measurement  
results indicating which speakers are connected  
and their sizes.  
S P E A K E R S  
I Z E  
I S T A N C E  
L A T M O D E  
The frequency is automatically approximated 2. Select MANUAL SETUPwith the or  
S
D
F
:
:
:
:
O K  
O K  
O K  
O K  
based on the front speaker characteristics and  
is indicated in dB by channel. (EQ mode:  
AUTO 2)  
cursor buttons.  
3. Press the OK / ENTER button to enter the  
F R O N T M O D E  
 �  
selection.  
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
This compensation level is indicated somewhere  
between -12 dB and +12 dB in 0.5 dB  
increments.  
M R A C  
L
1
S
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
I
Z E  
Notes:  
F R O N T  
L A R G E  
S M A L L  
L A R G E  
L A R G E  
S M A L L  
S M A L L  
L A R G E  
Y E S  
<SPEAKER SIZE>  
C E N T E R  
F R O N T  
The measured speaker distance may differ from  
the actual distance from speakers. Nevertheless,  
the measured value is suitable for the speakers.  
The included microphone is designed specifically  
for the SR9600. Other microphones do not  
guarantee suitable measurement results. Use the  
included microphone to conduct measurements.  
During measurement, press the OK/ENTER or  
EXIT button to cancel measurement.  
In some rooms, an error may occur during auto  
speaker setup or it may not be possible to set  
speaker distance correctly because of room  
acoustics. In such case, set the speaker distance  
using MANUAL SETUP.  
R
S P E A K E R  
T H X S P K R  
S U B  
S
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
I
Z E  
N O  
Y E S  
L A R G E  
L A R G E  
L A R G E  
2 C H  
L A R G E  
8 0 H z  
B O T H  
S U R R . R  
S U R R . B  
S U R R . B  
R
L
M R A C  
3
F R E Q .  
A U T O 2  
W
M O D E F R O N T  
6 3  
0 0  
5 0  
-
-
+
6
1
1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
5
5
0
5
5
0
5
0
F R O N T  
C E N T E R  
S U R R  
S U B  
.
W
L
C H  
+12  
: S R  
1
2
3
6
S U R R  
.
L P F H P F  
:
8 0 H z  
/
1 5 + 1 2  
S U R R . B  
S U R R . B  
L P F / H P F  
3 0  
2 k  
4 k  
8 k  
5 k  
+
+
-
1 0  
1 2  
8
1
9
S
I Z E  
d�  
B
0
R E T U R N  
N E X T E X I T  
B A S S  
M
I X  
:
-12  
-
-
k�  
16 Hz  
63  
10. Move the cursor to NEXTwith the or  
cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER  
button.  
1 2  
.
R E T U R N  
N E X T E X I T  
R E T U R N  
B A C K N E X T E X I T  
When setting the speaker size in the SPEAKER  
SIZE menu, use the guidelines below.  
LARGE:  
The complete frequency range for the channel  
you are setting will be output from the speaker.  
SMALL:  
Frequencies of the channel you are setting that  
are lower than approx. 80 Hz will be output from  
the subwoofer.  
If the SUB. W is set to NONEand the front  
speakers are set to LARGE,then the sound will  
be output from both the left and right speakers.  
The distance from the microphone to each of  
the speaker is displayed.  
15. Select CHwith the or cursor buttons.  
16. Move the cursor to NEXTwith the or  
cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER  
button.  
If the SPEAKER C selector switch (rear panel) is  
set to ON, the surround back speakers do not  
output audio.  
M R A C  
U N I T  
2
D
I S T A N C E  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
f
t
F R O N T  
L
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
0
9
9
1
2
1
6
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0 0  
3 3  
6 6  
5 0  
3 3  
6 6  
3 3  
5 0  
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
C E N T E R  
F R O N T  
R
S U R R . R  
S U R R . B  
S U R R . B  
M R A C  
M O D E  
L
4
-
L E V E L  
L A T  
R
L
Error indications during measurement  
If trouble occurs during measurement, an error  
message is displayed on the monitor screen and  
FL display. Those errors and their remedies are  
described below.  
F
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
F R O N T  
0
6
1
1
9
2
2
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0 d B  
5 d B  
5 d B  
0 d B  
5 d B  
0 d B  
5 d B  
0 d B  
S U R R  
S U B  
.
W
L
C E N T E R  
F R O N T  
-
-
+
+
1
-
R
S U R R . R  
S U R R . B  
S U R R . B  
R E T U R N  
B A C K N E X T E X I T  
R
L
+
-
S U R R  
S U B  
.
W
L
MIC SETUP ERROR  
1
11. Select either m (meters) or ft (feet) for UNIT  
4. Select each speaker with the or cursor  
buttons.  
The microphone (MC-10) is not properly  
connected.  
with the or cursor buttons.  
R E T U R N  
B A C K  
E X I T  
The speaker output level is automatically  
balanced and indicated in dB by channel.  
5. Set the size of each speaker with the or  
Check the microphone connection.  
12. Move the cursor to NEXTwith the or cursor  
buttons and then press the OK/ENTER button.  
The frequency is automatically compensated for  
to the flat level of the all channel and is indicated  
in dB by channel. (EQ mode: AUTO 1)  
cursor buttons.  
TOO MUCH NOISE  
6. After you complete this portion of the setup,  
Measurement cannot be done correctly  
because of excessive ambient noise.  
Either temporarily turn off power to noisy  
devices such as air conditioning or move  
them out of the room.  
move the cursor to NEXTwith the  
,
,
17. Move the cursor to EXITwith the  
,
,
and  
and  
cursor buttons and press the OK/  
cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER  
ENTER button to go to the next page.  
button to end calibration.  
This compensation level is indicated  
somewhere between -12 dB and +12 dB in 0.5  
dB increments.  
Notes:  
Retry measurement when the room is  
For settings, see the individual settings in 2-2  
MANUAL SETUP.  
To make changes to individual speakers, select 2.  
SPEAKER SETUPfrom the MAIN MENU,  
then select MANUAL from the 2-1 SPEAKER  
SETUP.  
quiet.  
M R A C  
3
F R E Q .  
A U T O 1  
M O D E  
C H  
F
L A T  
6 3  
0 0  
5 0  
-
-
+
6
1
1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
5
5
0
5
5
0
5
0
: S B L  
1
2
3
6
+12  
1 5 + 1 2  
3 0  
2 k  
4 k  
8 k  
5 k  
+
+
-
1 0  
1 2  
8
1
9
dB  
0
-12  
If using a THX certified speaker system, select  
SPEAKER SIZEfrom the MANUAL SETUP  
menu. Then, turn THX SPKRon. Move the  
-
-
63  
16kHz  
1 2  
.
R E T U R N  
B A C K N E X T E X I T  
cursor to LPF/HPFwith the  
,
,
and  
cursor buttons and select 80Hzwith the or  
13. Select CHwith the or cursor buttons.  
cursor buttons.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SUB W:  
Set the distance from the subwoofer to your  
normal listening position.  
THX SPKR  
Notes:  
<SPEAKER DISTANCE>  
If you are using a full THX speaker systems which  
are approved by THX Ltd:  
The front, center and surround speaker size  
should be SMALL.  
If NONEis selected for the SURR. setting, then  
this setting is fixed to NONE.”  
S P E A K E R  
U N I T  
D
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
I S T A N C E  
f
3
t
SURR. B L:  
F R O N T  
L
0
9
9
1
2
0
6
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0 0  
3 3  
6 6  
5 0  
3 3  
0 0  
3 3  
5 0  
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
You can use SURR. BACK terminals as multiroom  
speaker terminals when no surround back speaker  
are connected. (See page 27)  
C E N T E R  
F R O N T  
1
2
Set the distance from the surround back left  
speaker to your normal listening position.  
SURR. B R:  
R
The subwoofer should be YES.  
S U R R . R  
S U R R . B  
S U R R . B  
2
1
1 0  
R
L
LPF/HPF (the crossover frequency) should be  
80Hz.  
Set the distance from the surround back right  
speaker to your normal listening position.  
SURR. BACK SIZE  
LARGE:  
Select if the surround back speakers are large.  
SMALL:  
Select if the surround back speakers are small.  
S U R R  
S U B  
.
W
L
:
1
You need to set the number of surround back  
speakers and the surround back speaker size should  
be SMALL.  
Notes:  
R E T U R N  
B A C K N E X T E X I T  
Set the distance to each speaker in meters (m) or  
feet (ft) as follows.  
Use this menu to specify the distance of each  
speakers position from the listening position. The  
delay time is automatically calculated according to  
these distances.  
Begin by determining the ideal or most commonly  
used seating position in the room.  
This is important for the timing of the acoustics to  
create the proper sound space that the SR9600  
and todays sound systems are able to produce.  
Note:  
m: 0.05 - 30.00 m in 0.05 m steps  
ft: 0.16 - 100.00 ft in 0.16 ft steps  
(The values appearing on the FL display are  
approximate.)  
SUB W  
YES:  
If NONEis selected for the SURR. setting, then  
this setting is not available.  
Select when a subwoofer is connected.  
NO:  
Select when a subwoofer is not connected.  
For the speakers that you have selected NONE”  
the speaker size menu will not appear.  
LPF/HPF  
When you use a subwoofer, you can select the  
cutoff frequency for the small speakers used.  
Select one of the crossover frequency levels  
according to the size of the small speakers  
connected.  
60Hz 70Hz 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz  
120Hz 130Hz 140Hz 175Hz 200Hz  
The setting for surr.back L and surr.back R  
appears if it is set, two surround back speakers in  
the SPEAKER SIZE menu.  
FRONT  
LARGE:  
Note:  
Select if the front speakers are large.  
SMALL:  
Select if the front speakers are small.  
The setting of SURR. BACK appears if it is set for  
one surround back speaker in the SPEAKER SIZE  
menu.  
For speakers for which you have selected  
NONE, the speaker configuration sub-menu will  
not appear here. (There are several useful books  
and special DVD and LDs available to guide you  
through proper home theater configuration. If you  
are unsure, have your Marantz dealer perform the  
installation for you. They are trained professionals  
familiar with even the most sophisticated custom  
installations. Marantz recommends the  
www.cedia.org website for further information.)  
If NOis selected for the subwoofer setting, then  
this setting is fixed at LARGE.  
11. After you complete this portion of the setup,  
Note:  
move the cursor to NEXTwith the  
,
,
If using small front speakers, set a slightly higher  
frequency. If using large front speakers, set a  
slightly lower frequency.  
CENTER  
NONE:  
and  
cursor buttons and press the OK/  
ENTER button to go to the next page.  
Select if no center speaker is connected.  
LARGE:  
Select if the center speaker is large.  
SMALL:  
Select if the center speaker is small.  
BASS MIX  
The bass mix setting is only valid when  
LARGEis set for the front speakers and YES”  
is set for the subwoofer during stereo playback .  
8. Select either m (meters) or ft (feet) for UNIT  
with the or cursor buttons.  
9. Select each speaker with the or cursor  
This setting has effect only during playback of  
PCM or analog stereo sources.  
SURR.  
NONE:  
buttons.  
10. Set the distance for each speaker , press the  
or cursor buttons.  
Select if no surround left and right speakers are  
connected.  
LARGE:  
Select if the surround left and right speakers are  
large.  
SMALL:  
When BOTHis selected, the low frequencies  
will be played through the main left and right  
speakers, as well as the subwoofer.  
FRONT L:  
Set the distance from the front left speaker to  
your normal listening position.  
CENTER:  
In this playback mode, the low frequency range  
expands more uniformly throughout the room,  
but depending on the size and shape of the  
room, interference may result in a decrease of  
the actual volume of the low frequency range.  
Select if the surround left and right speakers are  
small.  
Set the distance from the center speaker to your  
normal listening position.  
FRONT R:  
Set the distance from the front right speaker to  
your normal listening position.  
SURR. L:  
Set the distance from the surround left speaker  
to your normal listening position.  
SURR. R:  
By selecting MIX, the low frequencies will play  
through the main left and right speakers only.  
SURR. B  
NONE:  
Select if no surround back left and right  
speakers are connected.  
2CH:  
Select if the surround back left and right  
speakers are connected.  
1CH:  
Select if one surround back speaker is connected.  
In this case, the audio signal is emitted from the  
SURR BACK LEFT output terminal.  
Note:  
LFE signals during playback of Dolby Digital or  
DTS will be played through the subwoofer.  
Set the distance from the surround right speaker  
to your normal listening position.  
7. After you complete this portion of the setup,  
move the cursor to NEXTwith the  
,
,
and  
cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER  
button to go to the next page.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<SPEAKER LEVEL>  
Speaker type and positioning  
15. Repeat steps 13 and 14 for the front right and  
other speakers until all speakers are adjusted  
to the same volume level.  
2-3 THX AUDIO SETUP  
This diagram shows the desired positioning for 7.1  
channel speaker systems used in ASA mode.  
During system setup, select the distance between  
surround back speakers.  
You can set the Boundary Gain Compensation and  
Advanced Speaker Array.  
S P E A K E R L E V E L  
T E S T M O D E  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
M A N U A L  
F R O N T  
L
0
6
1
1
9
2
2
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0 d B  
5 d B  
5 d B  
0 d B  
5 d B  
0 d B  
5 d B  
0 d B  
C E N T E R  
F R O N T  
-
-
+
+
1
-
After you complete this portion of the setup, press  
the OK/ENTER button to move the cursor to  
RETURN. Press the OK/ENTER button to go to  
2. SPKR SETUP.  
R
1. Select 2. SPEAKER SETUPfrom the MAIN  
S U R R . R  
S U R R . B  
S U R R . B  
MENU.  
R
L
FL  
C
FR  
+
-
2. Select THX AUDIO SETUPwith the or  
S U R R  
S U B  
.
W
L
Front-L  
Center  
Front-R  
cursor buttons.  
1
Notes:  
3. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the  
selection.  
Di-polar Radiating Speaker  
Direct Radiating Speaker  
R E T U R N  
B A C K  
E X I T  
Speakers for which you selected NONEin the  
SPEAKER SIZE menu will not appear.  
Surr. Back L and Surr. Back R appear if it is set  
for two surround back speakers in the SPEAKER  
SIZE menu.  
Surr. Back appears if it is set for one surround back  
speaker in the SPEAKER SIZE menu.  
To adjust the speaker levels for 7.1 channel input  
sources, you will need to use the 7.1 Ch Input sub  
menu. (See page 33)  
Here you can set the volume for each speaker so  
that they are all heard by the listener at the same  
level. We recommend using a SPL (Sound  
Pressure Level) meter, when available.  
T H X A U D I O S E T U P  
Surround-L  
Surround-R  
B O U N D A R Y G A I N C OM P  
T H X U L T R A 2 S U B - W : Y E S  
. G . C : O N  
.
SL  
SR  
Surround A  
Surround A  
B
.
A D V A N C E D S P K R A R R A Y  
S U R R . B S P K R  
Note:  
Surround Back  
L
R
The speaker level settings are not available in 7.1  
Channel Input mode, Pure Direct mode and  
Source Direct mode.  
: T O G E T H E R  
SBL SBR  
Surround B  
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
SUB W can be set from 18dB to +12dB.  
Note:  
TEST MODE:  
Select MANUALor AUTOgeneration of the  
test tone with the or cursor buttons.  
Boundary Gain Compensation  
THX ULTRA2 SUB-W : YES or NO  
If you have a THX Ultra2 certified subwoofer (or  
other subwoofer with flat anechoic response to 20  
Hz), select YES.  
If set to YES, you can chose to activate B.G.C.  
(Boundary Gain Compensation).  
If set to NO, Boundary Gain Compensation may  
not be activated and the feature is locked out.  
If you set SURR.B = 1CH or NONE in the  
SPEAKER SIZE menu, Advanced Speaker Array  
will not be activated.  
If you select AUTO, the test tone will be cycled  
through in a circular pattern beginning at Left  
Center Right Surround Right →  
Surround Back Right Surround Back Left →  
Surround Left Subwoofer Left, in 2  
seconds increments for each channel.  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
the cursor to RETURNwith  
buttons and press OK/ENTER button to go to the  
,
,
and cursor  
2. SPKR SETUP menu.  
Using the or cursor buttons, adjust the volume  
level of the noise from the speaker so that it is the  
same level for all the speakers.  
B.G.C.: ON or OFF  
OFF: Boundary Gain Compensation is not applied.  
ON: Boundary Gain Compensation is applied.  
If you select MANUAL, adjust the output level of  
each speaker as listed below.  
Notes:  
If you set SUB W = NO in SPEAKER SIZE menu,  
Boundary Gain Compensation will not be  
activated. THX ULTRA2 SUB-W also cannot be  
set.  
12. Move the cursor to FRONT L by pressing the  
cursor button. The SR9600 will emit a pink  
noise from the front left speaker.  
If you set THX ULTRA2 SUB-W = YES, the Bass  
Peak Level setting is not applied.  
Remember the level of this noise and then  
press the cursor button.  
(Note that this can be adjusted to any level  
between -12 and +12 dB in 0.5 dB increments.)  
The SR9600 will now emit the pink noise from  
Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)  
SURR.B SPKR: TOGETHER, CLOSE or APART  
The best ASA effect is when the surround back  
speakers are together and facing forward.  
If the distance between the surround back  
speakers is,  
Less than 12 in. (30 cm): TOGETHER  
Greater than 12 in. (30 cm), and less than 48 in.  
(122 cm): CLOSE  
13. tUhseincgenthteer spaenadker.cursor buttons, adjust the  
volume level of the noise from the center  
speaker so that it is the same level as the front  
14. lPerfet ssspethaeker.cursor button again. The SR9600  
will now emit the pink noise from the front right  
speaker.  
Greater than 48 in. (122 cm): APART  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-4 BASS PEAK LEVEL  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
the cursor to RETURNwith and cursor  
buttons and press OK/ENTER button to go to the  
,
,
1. Select 2. SPEAKER SETUPfrom the MAIN  
MENU.  
2. SPKR SETUP menu.  
2. Select BASS PEAK LEVELwith the or  
cursor buttons.  
Notes:  
3. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the  
selection.  
Each time the subwoofer level is changed,  
perform the bass peak level setup and correct the  
setting.  
B A S S P E A K L E V E L  
The bass peak level is not available in Pure Direct  
and Source Direct mode.  
B A S S P E A K T E S T : S T A R T  
V O L UM E L E V E L  
:
+
1 8  
.
0 d B  
The selected value is displayed in the volume  
‖‖‖‖‖‖‖‖‖‖‖‖‖‖■‖‖‖‖‖�  
column before the test signal starts.  
E N T E R  
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
With Dolby Digital and DTS, not only the LFE (Low  
Frequency Effects), but also the bass of all  
channels can be heard from the subwoofer or large  
speakers. This procedure prevents these speakers  
from becoming too loud and creating an  
unbalanced sound. Since the sound is output at a  
loud volume, perform this operation carefully.  
Note:  
If your system does not include a subwoofer, this  
setting will set the bass peak level for your front  
speakers.  
TEST SIGNAL: Press the or button.  
STARTis displayed and a bass  
test tone is generated from the  
speaker which was designated for  
bass signal output during setup.  
There will be no audible sound  
yet because the master volume  
is set to minimum automatically.  
VOLUME LEVEL: Adjust the bass test tone output  
level up until the bass begins to  
distort or you reach the maximum  
level with the  
button.  
or  
cursor  
ENTER: Press the OK button, ENTER”  
will blink and the bass peak test  
tone will no longer be generated.  
The bass peak limit level for your  
system has now been memorized.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-1 CHANNEL LEVEL  
3 SURROUND SETUP  
1. Select 3. SURR SETUPfrom MAIN MENU  
with or cursor buttons and press the OK/  
ENTER button.  
This menu is for setting surround effect parameters  
for the various surround input signals so as to bring  
out the live audio effect of your speaker system.  
3
.
S U R R S E  
T
U P  
C H A N N E L L E V E  
L
P
L
II  
x
/
:
M U S  
I
C
P A R A M E T E R  
CHANNEL LEVEL:  
C S II  
N E O  
T
6
S
X T P A R A M E T E R  
P A R A M E T E R  
2. Select CHANNEL LEVELwith the or  
cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER  
button.  
3-1 CHANNEL LEVEL(see page 41)  
R E  
L F  
-
E
E Q  
L E V E  
:
:
O F  
F
0
L
-
1
d B  
PLIIx MUSIC PARAMETER:  
3-2 PLIIx MUSIC PARAMETER(see page 42)  
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
3. Set the SURR. MODE with the or cursor  
CSII/TS XT PARAMETER:  
3-3 CSII / TS XT PARAMETER(see page 42)  
buttons.  
NEO:6 PARAMETER:  
C H A N N E L L E V E L  
3-4 NEO:6 PARAMETER(see page 42)  
S U R R . M O D E  
T H X U L T R A  
:
p.41  
p.42  
C S II T  
C
I N E M A  
��  
/
S
X T P A R A M E T E R  
C H A N N E L  
L
E V E  
L
S U R R . M O D E  
H X L T R A  
:
C E N T E R L E V E L  
S U R R . R L E V E L  
:
:
:
:
:
:
+
-
-
6
6
6
0
.
.
.
.
.
.
0 d B  
0 d B  
0 d B  
0 d B  
0 d B  
0 d B  
T
U
C
I
N
E M A  
��  
1. Select 3. SURR SETUPfrom the MAIN  
MENU with the or cursor buttons and  
T
R U B A S S  
:
:
0
0
C E N T E R  
L
L
L
L
L
L
E V E L  
E V E L  
E V E L  
E V E L  
E V E L  
E V E L  
:
:
:
:
:
:
+
-
-
6
6
6
0
2
6
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
0
0
0
0
0
d B  
d B  
d B  
d B  
d B  
d B  
S R S A L O G  
D
I
S
S
. B  
. B  
R
L
L E V E L  
L E V E L  
L E V E L  
L E V E L  
S U R R  
.
R
L
.
W
R
L
S
S
.
.
B
B
press the OK/ENTER button.  
S U R R  
S U B  
.
W
L
+
1 2  
-
S U R R  
S U B  
+
1
-
6
2. Select the desired menu with the  
or  
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER  
button.  
4. Select the desired menu item with the or  
cursor buttons, set the desired level with the  
or cursor buttons, and press the OK/ENTER  
button.  
p.42  
p.42  
P
L
x
M U S  
I
C
P A R A M E T E R  
II  
N E O  
:
6
P A R A M E T E R  
3
. S U R R S E T U P  
P A R A M E T E R  
P A N O R A M A  
:
C
U S T OM  
C E N T E R G A  
I
N
:
0
.
0
C H A N N E L L E V E L  
P L II x M U S I C P A R A M E T E R  
:
:
:
O F  
F
D
I M E N S  
I
O N  
-
3
3
C S  
/ T S X T P A R A M E T E R  
6
II  
N E O :  
C E N T E R  
W
I
D T  
H
P A R A M E T E R  
SURROUND MODE:  
R E - E Q  
L F E L E V E L  
:
:
O F F  
1 0 d B  
The surround mode can be independently set  
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
-
for 3 modes.  
1. Multi Ch STEREO  
2. CSII  
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
3. Others  
Note:  
RE-EQ:  
After you complete this portion of the setup, press  
the OK/ENTER button to move the cursor to  
RETURNand press the OK/ENTER button  
again to go to sub-menu.  
Turns THX Cinema Re-EQon and off.  
Select the Cinema Re-EQwith the  
cursor button to activate it.  
CHANNEL LEVEL  
or  
CENTER LEVEL:  
Set the effect level of the center speaker  
between 12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .  
If NONEwas selected for the center speaker  
setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting  
will not appear.  
LFE LEVEL:  
Select the output level of the LFE signal  
included in the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS  
signal.  
Select 0dB, 10 dBor OFFwith  
cursor button.  
or  
SURR L or R LEVEL:  
Set the effect level of the Surround speaker  
between 12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .  
If NONEwas selected for the surround speakers  
setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting  
will not appear.  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
the cursor to RETURNwith the cursor  
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.  
,
,
,
S. B L or R LEVEL:  
Set the effect level of the Surround Back  
speaker between 12 and +12 level in 0.5 level  
interval .  
If NONEwas selected for the surround back  
speakers setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this  
setting will not appear.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SUB W LEVEL:  
Set the effect level of the subwoofer speaker  
between 18 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .  
If NONEwas selected for the subwoofer  
speaker setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this  
setting will not appear.  
If NONEwas selected for the center speaker  
setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting  
cannot be selected.  
3-2 PLIIx (PRO LOGIC IIx) MUSIC PARAMETER  
3-4 NEO:6 PARAMETER  
Pro LogicIIx-Music mode creates a rich and  
enveloping surround ambience from stereo  
sources such as CDs.  
In this mode, the SR9600 includes three controls  
to fine-tune the sound field as follows.  
The DTS NEO:6 mode enables a maximum 6.1  
channel output with just 2 channel input. (It also  
supports 5.1 channel input.)  
This mode expands the sound image from the  
center channel.  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
cursor to RETURNwith the  
,
,
and cursor  
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.  
Note:  
Setting to a mode other than multichannel stereo  
or CSII will affect the speaker level as explained  
in "2-2 MANUAL SETUP".  
1. Select 3. SURR SETUPin MAIN MENU with  
1. Select 3. SURROUND SETUPfrom MAIN  
3-3 CSII/TS XT PARAMETER  
or  
cursor buttons and press the OK/  
MENU with the  
or  
cursor buttons and  
ENTER button.  
press the OK/ENTER button.  
1. Select 3. SURROUND SETUPfrom MAIN  
MENU with the  
or  
cursor buttons and  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
2. Select PLIIx MUSIC PARAMETERwith the  
2. Select NEO:6 PARAMETERwith the or  
press the OK/ENTER button.  
the cursor to RETURNwith the  
,
,
and  
or cursor buttons.  
cursor buttons.  
cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to  
2. Select CS II/TS XT PARAMETERwith the  
go to the 3. SURR SETUP menu.  
3. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the  
3. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the  
or cursor buttons.  
selection.  
selection.  
3. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the  
P L  
x
M U S I C P A R A M E T E R  
II  
N E O :  
6
P A R A M E T E R  
selection.  
P A R A M E T E R  
P A N O R A M A  
: C U S T OM  
: O F F  
C S II / T S X T P A R A M E T E R  
C E N T E R G A I N  
:
0
.
0
D
I M E N S I O N  
:
:
-
3
3
T R U B A S S  
S R S I A L O G  
:
:
0
0
C E N T E R W I D T H  
D
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
PARAMETER:  
Select DEFAULTor CUSTOMwith the or  
cursor buttons.  
If you select CUSTOM, you can adjust three  
parameters as listed below.  
4. Set the CENTER GAIN level between 0.0 and  
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
1.0 in 0.1 level increments with the  
cursor buttons.  
or  
TRUBASS:  
Set the TRUBASS level between 0 and 6 in 1-  
level increments with the or cursor buttons.  
TRUBASS produced by the speakers are an  
octave below the actual physical capabilities of the  
speakers adding exciting, deeper bass effects.  
PANORAMA:  
Select the PANORAMA mode ONor OFF”  
with the or cursor buttons.  
Panorama wraps the sound of the front left and right  
speakers around you, for an exciting perspective.  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
and cursor  
cursor to RETURNwith the  
,
,
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.  
SRS DIALOG:  
Notes:  
DIMENSION:  
Set the SRS DIALOG level between 0 and 6 in  
1- increments with the or cursor buttons.  
This can be popped out of the surround audio  
effects, allowing the listener to easily discern what  
the actors say.  
This parameter can only be set in the NEO:6-  
Music mode.  
Set the DIMENSION level between 3 and +3  
level in 1 level intervals with the or cursor  
buttons.  
If NONEwas selected for the center speaker  
setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting  
is disabled.  
Adjust the sound field either towards the front or  
towards the rear.  
This can be useful to help achieve a more  
suitable balance from all the speakers with  
certain recordings.  
If NONEwas selected for the center speaker  
setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting  
cannot be selected.  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
CENTER WIDTH:  
cursor to RETURNwith the  
,
,
and cursor  
Set the CENTER WIDTH level between 0 and 7  
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.  
in 1 level intervals with the  
buttons.  
or  
cursor  
Center width allows you to gradually spread the  
center channel sound into the front left and right  
speakers.  
At its widest setting, all the sound from the  
center is mixed into the left and right speakers.  
This control may help achieve a more spacious  
sound or a better blend for the front image.  
Note:  
This parameter can only be set in the CSII and  
Virtual (TruSurround XT) modes.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-1 VIDEO AUTO ON  
4-2 VIDEO COLOR BAR  
4 VIDEO SETUP  
This menu is for configuring video settings.  
This menu is for synchronizing the SR9600 with  
video components so that they can be powered  
up automatically and enter standby at the same  
time as the SR9600. Settings can be entered  
separately for each input source.  
1. Select 4. VIDEO SETUPfrom MAIN MENU  
with the or cursor buttons and press the  
OK/ENTER button.  
4
. V I D E O S E T U P  
V
V
I D E O A U T O O N  
I D E O C O L O R B A R  
VIDEO AUTO ON :  
4-1 VIDEO AUTO ON(see page 43)  
V
I D E O C O N V E R T  
:
:
:
E N A B L E  
I S A B L E  
E N A B L E  
2. Select VIDEO COLOR BARwith the or  
VIDEO COLOR BAR :  
A U T O  
O S D  
V
I D E O S E L  
D
cursor buttons.  
I N F O  
4-2 VIDEO COLOR BAR(see page 43)  
1. Select 4. VIDEO SETUPfrom MAIN MENU  
with the or cursor buttons and press the  
OK/ENTER button.  
3. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the  
selection. Color bars appear on the video  
display connected to the SR9600.  
1. Select 4. VIDEO SETUPfrom MAIN MENU  
with the or cursor buttons and press the  
OK/ENTER button.  
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
2. Select VIDEO AUTO ONwith the or  
cursor button.  
4
. V I D E O S E T U P  
4. Press the OK/ENTER button again to return to  
p.43  
the 4. VIDEO SETUP menu.  
V
V
I D E O A U T O O N  
I D E O C O L O R B A R  
3. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the  
V
I D E O A U T O O N  
Note:  
selection.  
V
I D E O A U T O O N  
:
E N A B L E  
V
I D E O C O N V E R T  
:
:
:
E N A B L E  
I S A B L E  
E N A B L E  
Color bars are not output to the video and S-video  
jacks.  
A U T O  
O S D  
V
I D E O S E L  
D
V
I D E O A U T O O N  
I N F O  
D V D  
L D  
T V  
: O N  
: O F F  
: O N  
V C R  
V C R  
A U X 1 : O F F  
1
2
: O N  
: O N  
V
I D E O A U T O O N  
:
E N A B L E  
D S S  
: O F F  
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
D V D  
L D  
T V  
: O N  
: O F F  
: O N  
V C R  
V C R  
A U X 1 : O F F  
1
2
: O N  
: O N  
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
D S S  
: O F F  
2. Select the desired menu with the  
or  
cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER  
p.43  
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
button.  
VIDEO CONVERT:  
4. Select the desired menu with the  
or  
Select the VIDEO CONVERT function to  
ENABLEor DISABLEwith the or cursor  
buttons.  
cursor buttons, and press the OK/ENTER  
button.  
(Video cable connection: See page 48)  
VIDEO AUTO ON:  
Select ENABLEor DISABLE.  
AUTO VIDEO SEL:  
Select the AUTO VIDEO SEL function to  
ENABLEor DISABLEwith the or cursor  
buttons. (See page 55)  
Video function:  
Set to ONor OFFwith the  
or  
cursor  
buttons.  
OSD INFO:  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
and cursor  
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.  
Select the OSD information function to  
ENABLEor DISABLEwith the or cursor  
buttons.  
cursor to RETURNwith the  
,
,
If you select ENABLE, the SR9600 will display  
the status of the feature (Volume up/down, input  
select, etc..) on the monitor. If you do not desire  
this information, select DISABLE.  
Note:  
VIDEO AUTO ON and RS232C are disabled in  
the ECONOMY STANDBYsetting.  
(See page 55)  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
cursor to RETURNwith the  
,
,
and cursor  
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-1 MULTI ROOM SETUP  
5 PREFERENCE  
SR9600 has features for 2 multiroom systems  
such as source selector, sleep timer, multiroom  
speaker output and remote control.  
5
.
I
P R E F E R E N C E  
MULTI ROOM SETUP :  
M U L T  
D C  
I
R
R O OM S E  
G G E R S E  
T
T
1
U P  
U P  
2
T
5-1 MULTI ROOM SETUP(see page 44)  
3
L
4
You can set these features in this menu.  
DC TRIGGER SETUP :  
S T A N D B Y  
:
:
:
N O RM A  
B
I
L
I
I
N G U A  
A U D  
L
I
M
A
I
N + S U B  
5-2 DC TRIGGER SETUP(see page 45)  
1. Select 5. PREFERENCEfrom MAIN MENU  
with the or cursor buttons and press the  
OK/ENTER button.  
H DM  
O
E N A B L  
E
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
1. Select 5. PREFERENCEfrom MAIN MENU  
with the or cursor buttons and press the  
OK/ENTER button.  
2. Select MULTI ROOM SETUPwith the or  
cursor buttons.  
p.45  
5
. P R E F E R E N C E  
p.44  
M U L T  
D C  
T
G -  
R
I
1
G G E R S E T U P  
I
R
O N  
O N  
D V D  
T
9
V A R  
-
R O OM S E T U P  
1
D C  
T
R
I
: M A  
I
N
R O OM  
o
o m  
A
R
O F  
O F  
T
T
1
9
F
o
o m  
F
B
M U L T  
I
R O OM S E T U P  
3. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the  
M U L T  
S P K R  
I
D C T R I G G E R S E T U P  
D V D  
L D  
T
D S S  
V C R  
V C R  
A U X  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
O N  
O F  
O F  
O N  
O F  
O F  
O F  
T
C D  
C D  
T
T
A P  
-
E
R
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
O F  
F
F
F
F
selection.  
1
2
3
4
F
F
O F  
O F  
O N  
O F  
O F  
O F  
V
I
D E O  
V
U
0
0
I
V
A U D  
I
O
U
0
2
1
A M  
0
n
1
0
F M  
U N E R  
U N E R  
1
2
0
m
I
0
i
.
m
0
i
0
n
M U L T  
I
R O OM S E T U P  
S T A N D B Y  
I N G U A L  
:
:
N O RM A L  
M A I N + S U B  
E N A B L E  
1
2
1
F
F
F
F
F
F
S
L E E P  
V O L  
R o o m  
O N  
O N  
A
R o o m  
O F F  
O F F  
T V  
B
B
I
L
A U X  
7
2
X E D  
d B  
.
1 C  
H
M U L T  
S P K R  
I D E O  
I
L E V E  
L
8
0
d B  
0
H D M I  
A U D I O :  
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
A
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
V
D V D  
A U D I O  
T U 2 A M  
1 0 0 0  
T U 1 F M  
1 0 0 0 0  
9 0 m i  
F I X E D  
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
.
S L E E P  
V O L  
L E V E L  
9 0 m i  
V A R  
8 0 d B  
n
n
I
D C  
T
G -  
R
I
2
G G E R S E T U P  
2
2. Select the desired menu with the  
or  
D C  
T
R
I
: M U L T  
I
R O OM  
-
0
d B  
cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER  
D V D  
L D  
T
D S S  
V C R  
V C R  
A U X  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
O N  
O F  
O F  
O N  
O F  
O F  
O F  
T
C D  
C D  
T
T
A P  
-
E
R
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
O F  
O F  
O F  
O N  
O F  
O F  
F
F
F
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
F
F
button.  
V
U N E R  
U N E R  
1
2
1
2
1
F
F
F
F
F
STAND BY:  
A U X  
7
2
4. Select the desired item with the or cursor  
button.  
MULTI (MULTI ROOM):  
To switch the multiroom output ONor OFF”  
.
1 C  
H
***�  
When this is set to ECONOMY, you can  
reduce the power consumption when the unit is  
in the Standby mode. When ECONOMYis  
selected, Video Auto Onand RS-232Care  
disabled when the unit is in the Standby mode.  
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
with the or cursor buttons.  
SPKR (SPEAKER):  
To switch the speaker output ONor OFFwith  
the or cursor buttons.  
VIDEO:  
Select the video source of the multiroom output  
with the or cursor buttons.  
AUDIO:  
Select the audio source of the multiroom output  
with the or cursor buttons.  
SLEEP:  
The sleep mode is available when the multiroom  
is active, set the time with or cursor buttons.  
The sleep timer can be set to a maximum 90  
minutes in 10 minute increments.  
VOL (VOLUME SETUP):  
Select whether the multiroom output level is  
variable or fixed with the or cursor buttons.  
LEVEL (VOLUME LEVEL):  
D C  
T
G -  
R
I
3
G G E R S E T U P  
3
D C  
T
R
I
: M U L T  
I
R O OM  
B
BILINGUAL:  
D V D  
L D  
T
D S S  
V C R  
V C R  
A U X  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
O N  
O F  
O F  
O N  
O F  
O F  
O F  
T
C D  
C D  
T
T
A P  
-
E
R
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
O F  
O F  
O F  
O N  
O F  
O F  
F
F
F
In the Bilingual mode, Dolby Digital and DTS  
output is set to either MAINor SUB. Select  
BILINGUALwith the and cursor buttons,  
then select MAIN SUB MAIN+SUB with  
the or cursor buttons.  
F
F
V
U N E R  
U N E R  
1
2
1
2
1
F
F
F
F
F
A U X  
7
2
.
1 C  
H
***�  
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
HDMI AUDIO:  
This setting determines whether to play back  
audio input to the HDMI jacks through the  
SR9600 or output it through the receiver to a TV  
or projector.  
D C  
T
G -  
R
I
4
G G E R S E T U P  
R E M O T  
4
D C  
T
R
I
:
E
D V D  
L D  
T
D S S  
V C R  
V C R  
A U X  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
T
C D  
C D  
T
T
A P  
-
E
R
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
***�  
***�  
***�  
***�  
***�  
***�  
***�  
***�  
***�  
***�  
***�  
***�  
***�  
***�  
V
ENABLE: The audio input to the HDMI jacks  
can be played back by this receiver.  
In such case, audio signals are not  
output to the TV or projector.  
THROUGH: The audio input to the HDMI jacks  
is not output from the speaker  
terminals of the SR9600. Audio  
data is output directly to the TV or  
projector. This setting is used to  
listen to audio on a multi channel  
TV, etc. When this mode has been  
selected, HDMI THRappears on  
the FL display.  
U N E R  
U N E R  
1
2
1
2
1
A U X  
7
2
.
1 C  
H
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
Note:  
Adjust the multiroom output level with the or  
cursor buttons. The volume can be set between  
-90 dB and 0 dB in 1 dB increments.  
After you complete this portion of the setup, press  
the OK/ENTER button to move the cursor to  
RETURNand press the OK/ENTER button to  
go to the sub menu.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
This setting can be changed when the SURR B is  
5-2 DC TRIGGER SETUP  
This unit has 4 DC trigger control jacks, which can  
be used to link with input functions for the main  
room or multiroom.  
set to NONEin the SPEAKER SIZE menu and  
SPEAKER Cis in the OFF position on the rear  
panel. When this setting is unavailable, ✽✽✽is  
displayed.  
Each trigger can be setup separately.  
1. Select 5. PREFERENCEfrom MAIN MENU  
with the or cursor buttons and press the  
OK/ENTER button.  
If VOLUMEis set to FIXED, the multiroom  
output level cannot be adjusted from the A or B  
room.  
SPKR cannot be on for both Room A and Room B  
at the same time.  
2. Select DC TRIGGER SETUPwith the  
,
,
, and cursor buttons.  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
the cursor to RETURNwith the or cursor  
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.  
3. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the  
selection.  
D C T R I G G E R S E T U P  
D C T R I G -  
1
: M A I N R O OM  
D V D  
L D  
T V  
: O N T A P E : O F F  
: O F F C D -  
: O F F C D  
R
: O F F  
: O F F  
D S S  
V C R 1  
V C R 2  
A U X 1  
: O N  
T U N E R 1 : O N  
: O F F T U N E R 2 : O F F  
: O F F A U X 2  
: O F F 1 C H  
: O F F  
: O F F  
7
.
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
4. You can select MAIN ROOM, MULTI  
ROOM A, MULTI ROOM B, REMOTEor  
DISABLEwith the or cursor buttons.  
Note:  
When set to REMOTE, DC trigger output can  
be controlled from RC3200B.  
5. Select desired input source with the or  
cursor buttons.  
6. Set to ONor OFFwith the or cursor  
buttons.  
7. After you complete this portion of the setup,  
move the cursor to RETURNwith the or  
cursor button and press the OK/ENTER button.  
Note:  
When an input source that is on in the set room is  
selected, voltage is output to the DC TRIGGER  
output terminal.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 ACOUSTIC EQ  
This display is for setting up the equalizer and  
changing the Equalizer mode.  
6
.
A C O U S T  
I
C
:
E Q  
O F  
.
E Q . M O D E  
F
PRESET G. EQ 1 & 2 ADJ :  
P R E S E T  
P R E S E T  
C H E C K A U T O 1  
C H E C K A U T O 2  
G
G
.
.
E Q 1 A D  
E Q 2 A D  
J
J
6-1 PRESET G. EQ 1 & 2 ADJ(see page 47)  
CHECK AUTO 1 & 2 :  
6-2 CHECK AUTO 1 & 2(see page 47)  
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
EQ MODE:  
Set to one of the 4 equalizer modes, either from the  
manual modes (PRESET G. EQ 1/2) or the auto  
modes set by the MRAC mode (AUTO 1/2). Set to  
OFFif not using the equalizer.  
p.47  
p.47  
P R E S E T  
1
A D J U S T  
C H E C K A U T  
O
1
3
0
0
5 +  
0
k
k
k
k
R E S E T  
C H  
:
:
A
L
L C H  
6
2
5
0
1
2
4
8
6
3
5
0
0 +  
k
k
k
k
k
-
-
6
1
1
2
8
1
9
0
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
5
5
0
5
5
0
5
0
M O D E  
C H  
F
F
L A T  
R
6
0
5
1
3
2
4
8
5
-
-
6
1
1
2
8
1
9
0
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
5
5
0
5
5
0
5
0
:
S R  
1
2
5
1
2
3
6
+
1
+
+
-
+
1
+
+
-
+12  
+12  
1. Select 6. ACOUSTIC EQfrom MAIN MENU  
with the or cursor buttons and press the  
OK/ENTER button.  
d�  
0
B
d�  
B
0
-12  
-12  
-
-
1
1
1k  
63 250  
125 500 2k  
k�  
-
-
1
1
4k 16 Hz  
8k  
63  
16kHz  
1
1
2
.
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
6
. A C O U S T I C E Q .  
E Q . M O D E O F F  
:
p.47  
p.47  
P R E S E T G . E Q 1 A D J  
P R E S E T G . E Q 2 A D J  
C H E C K A U T O 1  
P R E S E T  
2
A D J U S T  
C H E C K A U T  
R O N T  
S R  
O
2
3
0
0
5 +  
0
k
k
k
k
R E S E T  
C H  
:
:
A
L
L C H  
6
2
5
0
1
2
4
8
6
3
5
0
0 +  
k
k
k
k
k
-
-
6
1
1
2
8
1
9
0
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
5
5
0
5
5
0
5
0
M O D E  
F
6
0
5
1
3
2
4
8
5
-
-
6
1
1
2
8
1
9
0
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
5
5
0
5
5
0
5
0
S R  
1
2
5
C H  
:
1
2
3
6
+
1
+
+
-
+
1
+
+
-
+12  
C H E C K A U T O 2  
+12  
d�  
d�  
B
0
B
0
-12  
-12  
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
1
1k  
63 250  
125 500 2k  
k�  
4k 16 Hz  
8k  
63  
16kHz  
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
1
1
2
.
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
2. Select EQ. MODEwith the or cursor  
buttons.  
3. Select EQ1, EQ2, AUTO1, AUTO2or  
OFFwith the or cursor buttons.  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
the cursor to RETURNwith the  
,
,
and  
cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.  
Note:  
The equalizer is not available in the Source Direct,  
Pure Direct, Dolby Headphone and 192kHz PCM  
modes.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-1 PRESET G. EQ 1 & 2 ADJ  
These modes allow you to set a 9-band graphic  
equalizer for each of the 7 channels.  
6-2 CHECK AUTO 1 & 2  
These menus are for confirming the results of  
MRAC equalizer measurement (AUTO 1/2).  
7 AUDIO STATUS  
This menu provides current audio information.  
1. Select 7. STATUSfrom MAIN MENU with  
the or cursor buttons and press the OK/  
ENTER button.  
1. Select 6. ACOUSTIC EQfrom MAIN MENU  
with the or cursor buttons and press the  
OK/ENTER button.  
1. Select 6. ACOUSTIC EQfrom MAIN MENU  
with the or cursor buttons and press the  
OK/ENTER button.  
7
.
S T A T U  
:
S
S U R R . M O D E  
2. Select PRESET G. EQ 1 ADJ (or PRESET  
2. Select CHECK AUTO 1 (or CHECK AUTO 2)”  
T H X S U R R O U N D  
E X  
:
G. EQ 2 ADJ) with the or cursor buttons.  
with the or cursor buttons.  
I
N P U T F O R M A T  
:
D i  
:
g
k
i
t
a
l
3. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the  
3. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
selection.  
selection.  
SL  
SR  
F
s
4
8
H
z
P R E S E T  
R E S E T : A L L C H  
1
A D J U S T  
6 3  
C H E C K A U T O  
L A T  
: F R  
1
6 3  
0 0  
5 0  
-
-
+
6
1
1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
5
5
0
5
5
0
5
0
M O D E  
C H  
F
-
-
6
1
1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
5
5
0
5
5
0
5
0
R E T U R N  
E X  
I
T
C H  
+12  
: S R  
1
2
5
2 5  
5 0  
1
2
3
6
+
+12  
0 0 + 1 2  
1 5 + 1 2  
SURR. MODE:  
1 k  
2 k  
4 k  
8 k  
6 k  
+
+
-
1 0  
1 2  
8
1
9
3 0  
2 k  
4 k  
8 k  
5 k  
+
+
-
1 0  
1 2  
8
1
9
d�  
B
0
d�  
B
0
Displays the selected surround mode.  
-12  
FORMAT:  
-
-
-12  
1k  
125 500 2k  
k�  
63 250  
4k 16 Hz  
8k  
-
-
63  
16kHz  
1
Displays the audio format of the input source.  
1 2  
.
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
Fs:  
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
Displays the sampling frequency of the input  
source.  
RESET:  
Using the  
INPUT (OUTPUT)  
The CHECK AUTO 1 menu displays the frequency  
which is automatically compensated for the flat  
level of the all channels.  
The CHECK AUTO 2 menu displays the frequency  
which is automatically compensated for the front  
speaker characteristics.  
or  
cursor buttons, select the  
Select INPUTor OUTPUTwith the  
cursor buttons.  
or  
channel(s) to be reset to either the currently  
displayed channel (THIS) or all channels  
(ALLCH), and press the OK/ENTER button to  
enter the setting.  
INPUT:  
Displays the input channel of the source signal.  
CH:  
OUTPUT:  
Displays the output channel.  
Select the channel (FL, C, FR, SR, SBL,  
SBRor SL) to adjust with the or cursor  
buttons, and switch to the adjustment mode with  
the cursor button.  
CH:  
Select the channel to check with the  
cursor buttons.  
or  
To select RETURNwith the  
,
,
and cursor  
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to go to  
Frequency:  
Note:  
MAIN MENU.  
Select the target frequency on the graph with the  
or cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER  
button to enter the selection. Adjust the level  
with the or cursor buttons. (Note that this  
can be adjusted to any level between 12 and  
+12 dB in 0.5 dB increments.) Press the OK/  
ENTER button to enter the setting.  
The frequency will not be exactly the same as in  
the Preset G. EQ modes.  
FL and FR are not indicated on the CHECK  
AUTO 2 menu.  
Note:  
When playing back a disk such as an SACD or  
DVD-Audio disk via i.LINK or HDMI, the actual  
audio and display may not match with some DVD  
players.  
Select RETURN, press the or cursor buttons  
and press the OK/ENTER button to go to 6.  
ACOUSTIC EQ..  
Move to the next frequency with the  
cursor buttons, and adjust the level.  
or  
After you complete this portion of the setup, move  
cursor to RETURNwith the and cursor  
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.  
,
,
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• The video convert feature constantly monitors  
input video signals and determines whether to  
convert the input signals or not. However, some  
input video signals cannot be detected correctly.  
As the input source is changed, the SR9600 will  
automatically switch to the digital input, surround  
mode, attenuation, and night mode status which  
were entered during the configuration process  
for that source.  
DVD LD TV DSS VCR1 VCR2 ↔  
AUX1 TAPE CD-R CD TUNER1 ↔  
TUNER2 AUX2 DVxxxx SAxxxx ↔  
DVD...  
BASIC OPERATION  
(PLAYBACK)  
If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the  
VIDEO SETUP” menu to “DISABLE”.  
The remote control operations in this chapter are  
performed with the remote control unit set to the A/  
V Amp mode. To set the Amp mode, press the A/V  
Amp button on the Home menu of the remote  
control unit.  
Notes:  
• When an audio source is selected, the last video  
input used remains routed to the VCR-1 & VCR-  
2/DVD-R OUTPUT and MONITOR OUTPUT.  
This permits simultaneous viewing and listening  
to different sources.  
• “NO NAME” appears for devices for which there  
is no name information.  
Example:  
• Analog/digital input cannot be switched. (See  
page 56)  
Monitor is connected via component terminals.  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR9600  
• The last selected input source is selected as the  
video signal.  
wed Jun 01  
1/4 Home  
4:40pm  
VOLUME  
INPUT SELECTOR  
When a video source is selected, the video signal  
for that input will be routed to the MONITOR  
OUTPUT jacks and will be viewable on a TV  
monitor connected to the SR9600.  
If a component video input is connected to the  
COMPONENT 1 to 4 inputs, it will be routed to the  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT. Make certain  
that your TV is set to the proper input to view the  
signal.  
DOWN  
UP  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
DOWN  
TUNING  
UP  
BAND  
F/P  
SURROUND  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
MODE  
AUTO  
MULTI  
A
U
T
O
T
U
N
E
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
7
.
1
C
H
I
N
P
U
T
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
MRAC  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
MIC  
The temporary input source item for the i.LINK  
device disappears in the following cases. In such  
case, the selection returns to the last selected  
input source.  
VIDEO  
or S-VIDEO  
or component  
component  
• If the i.LINK device is disconnected or power to  
the i.LINK device is turned off  
Monitor is connected via the video or S-video  
terminals.  
• If the i.LINK device is assigned as an input source  
• If power to the SR9600 is tuned off  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR9600  
i.LINK FUNCTION  
VOLUME  
INPUT SELECTOR  
DOWN  
UP  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
DOWN  
TUNING  
UP  
BAND  
F/P  
When an audio-supporting i.LINK device (source  
devices only) is newly connected to the SR9600, a  
temporary input source item specifically for the  
i.LINK device is added between “DVD” and  
AUX2”. It can be selected using the INPUT  
SELECTOR knob or via the Input button on the  
remote control unit.  
SURROUND  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
MODE  
AUTO  
MULTI  
A
U
T
O
T
U
N
E
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
7
.
1
C
H
I
N
P
U
T
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
MRAC  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX 1 INPUT  
S-VIDEO VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
MIC  
VIDEO CONVERT  
SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE  
Before you can listen to any input media, you must  
first select the input source on the SR9600.  
When this mode is activated, the video or  
S-video signal can be emitted from the VIDEO, S-  
VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO output terminal.  
To activate this mode, select “VIDEO CONVERT”  
from “4. VIDEO SETUP” menu and set “ENABLE”.  
VIDEO  
or S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
or S-VIDEO  
Example: DVD  
The signal cannot be converted from component to  
video or S-video.  
wed Jun 01  
1/8 A/V Amp  
Source Select  
4:40pm  
Notes:  
1.  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR9600  
EXAMPLE: WHEN “DVxxxx” OR “SAxxxx” i.LINK  
DEVICE HAS BEEN NEWLY CONNECTED TO THE  
SR9600  
VOLUME  
INPUT SELECTOR  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR9600  
• The component video signal is emitted only from  
the COMPONENT VIDEO output terminal.  
When the video equipment is connected to  
component terminals, connect the monitor and  
SR9600 using the component terminals.  
DOWN  
UP  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
DOWN  
TUNING  
UP  
BAND  
F/P  
SURROUND  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
MODE  
AUTO  
MULTI  
A
U
T
O
T
U
N
E
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
7
.
1
C
H
I
N
P
U
T
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
INPUT SELECTOR  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
MRAC  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX 1 INPUT  
S-VIDEO VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
MIC  
2.  
wed Jun 01  
1/8 A/V Amp  
Source Select  
4:40pm  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
1.  
VIDEO  
or S-VIDEO  
SURROUND  
MODE  
AUTO  
MUL  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR9600  
component  
• This mode is unavailable for the REC out terminal.  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
STANDBY  
This mode is unavailable for still picture, fast  
forward and reverse play on video component.  
INPUT SELECTOR  
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
Notes of OSD menu system :  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
• If, while attempting to use the video convert  
feature, the SR9600 cannot synchronize with the  
display device, “NO SIGNAL” appears on the  
monitor or noise is generated, this feature cannot  
be used. All of these signs are caused by  
equipment incompatibility; there is nothing  
wrong with the SR9600.  
• The setup menu can be displayed through all  
video out terminals (“COMPONENT”, “S-  
VIDEO”, and “VIDEO”).  
SURROUND  
MODE  
AUTO  
MUL  
1.  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
STANDBY  
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
• Setting information (e.g. volume setting) is  
displayed through VIDEO and S-VIDEO out  
terminals when the VIDEO CONVERT function is  
set to “ENABLE”.  
1. Select “DVD” by turning the INPUT SELECTOR  
knob on the front panel.  
Or, tap the “A/V Amp” on the remote control  
unit and press the page up button until page  
1/8 is displayed. Press the DVD”.  
If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the  
VIDEO SETUP” menu to “DISABLE”. Next,  
connect the video input signal to the display  
component via the MONITOR OUT terminal  
under VIDEO and the S-video input signal to the  
display component via the MONITOR OUT  
terminal under S-VIDEO.  
Note:  
No setting information is displayed when the  
signal is emitted from the COMPONENT IN to  
COMPONENT OUT.  
1. Select “DVxxxx” or SAxxxx” by turning the  
INPUT SELECTOR knob on the front panel.  
Or, tap the “A/V Amp” on the remote control  
unit and press the page up button until page  
1/8 is displayed. Press the Input”.  
2. After you have selected DVD, simply turn on  
the DVD player and play the DVD.  
• Setting information (e.g. volume setting) is  
displayed through the S-VIDEO or VIDEO  
outputs when the VIDEO CONVERT function is  
set to DISABLE”. When the S-VIDEO and  
VIDEO outputs are used simultaneously, the  
setting information is displayed through the S-  
VIDEO output only.  
As the input source is changed, the new input  
name will appear momentarily on the video  
display. The input name will also appear in the FL  
display on the front panel.  
The input sources are displayed on the FL display  
in the following order.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING THE SURROUND MODE  
ADJUSTING THE MAIN VOLUME  
ADJUSTING THE TONE (BASS &  
TREBLE) CONTROL  
During a listening session you may wish to adjust  
the bass and treble control to suit your listening  
tastes or room acoustics.  
USING THE SLEEP TIMER  
Using the SR9600  
wed Jun 01  
5/8 A/V Amp  
Mode  
4:40pm  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR9600  
VOLUME  
INPUT SELECTOR  
DOWN  
UP  
TUNING  
UP  
BAND  
F/P  
VOL  
CH  
S
OK  
wed Jun 01  
6/8 A/V Amp  
Tone Adjust  
4:40pm  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
DOWN  
TUNI  
1.  
AUTO TUNE  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
DISPLAY  
H
SURROUND  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
MODE  
AUTO  
MULTI  
Ex  
M
MRAC  
ENTER  
EXIT  
7.1CH INPUT  
AUX 1 INPUT  
S-VIDEO VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
MIC  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
STANDBY  
ENT  
MENU  
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
Adjust the volume to a comfortable level using the  
VOLUME control knob on the front panel or the  
To select the auto surround mode during playback,  
press the AUTO button on the front panel.  
VOL  
/
buttons on the remote control unit.  
1. To program the SR9600 for automatic standby,  
tap the Sleep on the remote control unit.  
To increase the volume, turn the VOLUME knob  
clockwise or press VOL button on the remote  
control unit, and to decrease the volume, turn  
counterclockwise or press VOL button on the  
remote control unit.  
To add the THX effect to the Auto Surround mode,  
press the THX button on the front panel.  
To select a specific surround mode, press the  
SURROUND MODE button on the front panel.  
Each tap of the button will increase the time  
before shutdown in the following sequence:  
To adjust the tone, tap the A/V Amp and press the  
page up button until page 6/8 is displayed.  
To adjust the bass effect, tap Bass + or Bass .  
To adjust the treble effect, tap Treble + or Treble .  
OFF  
10  
20  
30  
40  
Notes:  
Using the remote control unit  
90  
80  
70  
60  
50  
The volume can be adjusted within the range of –  
to +18 dB, in 0.5 dB.  
Note:  
wed Jun 01  
2/8 A/V Amp  
Surround Mode 1  
4:40pm  
2. The sleep time will be shown for a few seconds  
on the FL display, and it will count down until  
the time has elapsed.  
wed Jun 01  
3/8  
4:40pm  
The tone control function is unavailable for the  
Virtual, Source Direct, Pure Direct, Dolby  
Headphone, THX mode, and 192kHz PCM.  
A/V Amp  
Surround Mode 2  
However, when the channel level is set as described  
on page 39, if the volume for any channel is set at  
+1 dB or greater, the volume cannot be adjusted up  
to 18 dB.  
(In this case the maximum volume adjustment  
range is 18 dB)  
When the programmed sleep time has elapsed,  
the SR9600 will automatically turn off.  
Note that the SLEEP indicator on the FL  
display will illuminate when the sleep mode is  
set.  
TEMPORARILY TURNING OFF  
THE SOUND  
3. To cancel the sleep mode, tap the Sleep until  
the SLEEP OFFand the SLEEP indicator  
disappear.  
wed Jun 01  
4/8  
4:40pm  
A/V Amp  
Surround Mode 3  
VOL  
CH  
S
OK  
H
Ex  
M
To temporarily silence all speaker outputs such as  
when interrupted by a phone call, press the H  
button on the remote.  
This will interrupt the output to all speakers and the  
head phone jack, but it will not affect any recording  
or dubbing that may be in progress.  
When the system is muted, MUTEappears on  
the display.  
To select the auto surround mode, tap the A/V  
Ampand press the page up button until page 2/8  
is displayed. Tap the AUTO.  
To add the THX effect to the Auto Surround mode,  
tap the THX mode button on page 2/8 of the  
remote control unit.  
To select a specific surround mode, tap the mode  
button on pages 2/8 to 4/8 on the remote control  
unit.  
Press the H button again to return to normal  
operation.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NIGHT MODE  
RE-EQ  
LIP.SYNC  
This menu is for turning THX Cinema Re-EQon  
and off. The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will  
be excessively bright and harsh when played back  
over audio equipment in the home. This is because  
film soundtracks were designed to be played back  
in large movie theater environments.  
Activating the Cinema Re-EQmode when  
watching a film made for movie theaters corrects  
this and restores the correct tonal balance.  
Cinema Re-EQis therefore not necessary for  
material that was not designed for movie theaters  
(for example, sports programming, television  
shows, made for TV movies, etc.).  
Depending on the display component (TV, monitor,  
projector, etc.) connected to the SR9600, a time lag  
can occur between image signal processing and  
audio signal processing. Though minor, this time  
lag can interfere with movie and music enjoyment.  
The Lip.Sync mode delays the audio signal with  
respect to the image signal output from the SR9600  
to correct the time lag between the sound and  
image.  
wed Jun 01  
5/8 A/V Amp  
Mode  
4:40pm  
1.  
1. Tap the A/V Amp and press the page up  
button until page 5/8 is displayed. Tap the L-  
Syncon the remote control unit.  
The Cinema Re-EQmode can be activated only  
while in Dolby Pro Logic mode, or while decoding  
Dolby Digital or DTS-encoded material.  
wed Jun 01  
5/8 A/V Amp  
Mode  
4:40pm  
1. Tap the Night on the remote control unit to  
turn on the Night mode.  
wed Jun 01  
5/8 A/V Amp  
Mode  
4:40pm  
Setting the Night mode to ONcompresses  
the dynamic range in Dolby Digital only.  
This softens loud passages such as sudden  
explosions, to help prevent disturbing others  
late at night.  
2. To turn off the Night mode, tap the Night again.  
1.  
1.  
DIALOGUE NORMALIZATION  
MESSAGE  
Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of  
Dolby Digital.  
2. Select the time lag with the and cursor  
buttons on the remote control unit.  
1. Tap the Re EQon the remote control unit to  
turn on the Re-EQmode.  
When playing back software which has been  
encoded in Dolby Digital, sometimes you may see  
a brief message on the FL display which will read  
"Dial Norm X dB" (X being a numeric value).  
Dialogue Normalization serves to let you know if  
the source material has been recorded at a higher  
or lower level than usual. For example, if you see  
the following message: "Dial Norm + 4 dB" on the  
FL display, to keep the overall output level  
constant just turn down the volume control by 4 dB.  
In other words, the source material that you are  
listening to has been recorded 4 dB louder than  
usual.  
2. To turn off the Re-EQmode, tap the Re EQ”  
again.  
VOL  
CH  
S
OK  
2.  
2.  
H
Ex  
M
Note:  
The Re-EQmode can be selected from the OSD  
menu system. (See page 41)  
The initial setting is OFF(0 ms). The time lag can  
be adjusted in 10 ms increments up to 200 ms.  
Watch the picture on the image device (e.g., TV,  
monitor, projector, etc.) as you adjust the time lag.  
If you do not see a message on the FL display,  
then no adjustment of the volume control is  
necessary.  
Note:  
The Lip.Sync mode is set to OFF(0 ms) in the  
Pure Direct and Source Direct mode. When the  
Pure Direct (or Source Direct) mode is deactivated,  
the previously set value of the Lip. Sync mode is  
automatically restored.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUTO  
Note:  
When playing Dolby Digital Surround EX-  
2
MODE  
SURROUND MODE  
When this mode is selected, the SR9600  
determines whether the digital input signal is Dolby  
Digital, Dolby Digital Surround EX, DTS, DTS-ES,  
DTS 96/24 or PCM audio.  
Surround EX & DTS-ES will operate for multichannel  
sources that have a Dolby Digital Surround EX or  
DTS-ES auto trigger flag in the digital signal.  
When a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input, the  
number of channels for which the corresponding  
signal is encoded will be played.  
Inputting a Dolby Digital two channel signal with  
Dolby surround status automatically subjects that  
signal to Pro Logic IIx movie processing before  
play.  
PCM 96 kHz source material can be played in this  
mode.  
(Dolby Digital, Pro Logic IIx MOVIE, Pro Logic IIx  
MUSIC, Pro Logic IIx GAME)  
This mode is used with source materials encoded  
in Dolby Digital and Dolby Surround.  
encoded software in 6.1 channels, it is required to  
select the THX Surround EX mode.  
SURROUND  
The SR9600 is equipped with many surround  
modes. These are provided to reproduce a variety  
of surround sound effects, according to the content  
of the source to be played.  
The available surround modes may be restricted  
depending on the input signal and speaker setup.  
THX ULTRA2 CINEMA  
DOLBY DIGITAL  
This mode is enabled when playing source  
materials encoded in Dolby Digital.  
Playing multichannel-encoded 5.1 channel Dolby  
Digital sources provides 5 main audio channels  
(left, center, right, surround left and surround right)  
and a Low Frequency Effect channel.  
Dolby Digital EX decoding is not available in this  
mode.  
THX Ultra2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all  
7.1 speakers giving you the best possible movie  
watching experience. In this mode, ASA processing  
blends the surround L/R speakers and surround  
back speakers, providing the optimal mix of ambient  
and directional surround sound.  
This mode permits the playback of a non Surround  
EX/ES-encoded 5.1 movie over a 7.1 system.  
DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby  
Digital Surround EX-encoded soundtracks will be  
automatically detected, if the appropriate flag has  
been encoded.  
Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are  
missing the digital flag that allows automatic  
switching.  
If you know that the movie that you are watching is  
encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select  
the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise the  
THX Ultra2 Cinema mode will apply ASA processing  
to provide optimum replay.  
SOURCE DIRECT  
In the Source Direct mode, the tone control circuit  
and bass management configuration are bypassed  
for full-range frequency response and the purist  
audio reproduction.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx has 5 modes:  
Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround  
sound from Dolby Surround, encoded stereo  
movie soundtracks.  
Notes:  
Notes:  
When you use this mode with certain DVD and  
CD players, performing operations such as skip or  
stop may momentarily interrupt the output.  
Speaker size is set to Front L/R = LARGE, Center =  
LARGE, Surround L/R = LARGE and Subwoofer  
= YES automatically. Tone controls, equalizer and  
additional processing are deactivated.  
Pro Logic IIx MUSIC  
When the signal is not decoded, the mode is  
changed to AUTO mode automatically. See page  
53 to confirm the available decoding modes.  
This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround  
sound from conventional stereo sources (analog or  
digital), such as CD, tape, FM, TV, stereo VCR, etc.  
Pro Logic IIx GAME  
When you use this mode with certain DVD and  
CD players, performing operations such as skip or  
stop may momentarily interrupt the output.  
THX CINEMA  
This mode restores the impact low-frequency  
surround effects by routing them to the systems  
subwoofer.  
5.1ch + Pro Logic IIx Movie  
This mode provides 7.1 channel surround sound  
from 5.1 channel sources movie soundtracks  
5.1ch + Pro Logic IIx Music  
This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround  
sound from 5.1 channel sources music soundtracks.  
THX Cinema mode applies additional processing  
to Dolby Digital, DTS and Dolby Pro Logic multi-  
channel, surround sources. The THX processing  
was developed by Lucasfilm Ltd. to recreate the  
sound of top-quality theater.  
Use the THX Cinema mode for all movies on disc,  
tape or broadcast. In this mode, the THX Surround  
EX mode is not available.  
THX MUSIC  
PURE DIRECT  
For the replay of multichannel music, the THX  
Music mode should be selected. In this mode, THX  
ASA processing is applied to the surround  
channels of all 5.1-encoded music sources, such  
as DTS and Dolby Digital, to provide a wide, stable,  
rear soundstage.  
This mode is to be used with multichannel music  
sources such as DTS 5.1 music and Dolby Digital  
5.1 music.  
The Pure Direct mode further reduces sources of  
noise in addition to effect of the Source Direct  
mode, by blocking output from the video jacks  
(VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT VIDEO and  
HDMI) and turning the FL display off.  
.
THX SURROUND EX  
Notes:  
In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have  
been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX  
technology are able to reproduce an extra channel  
which has been added during the mixing of the  
program.  
This channel, called Surround Back, places  
sounds behind the listener in addition to the  
currently available front left, front center, front  
right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer  
channels.  
Pro Logic IIx mode will decode as Pro Logic II  
mode when the SURR. B is set to NONEfrom  
SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See page 37)  
Notes:  
These modes are only available when you have  
setup SPEAKER SIZE menu system (i.e. 2  
surround back speakers).  
Pro Logic IIx mode is available for a 2 channel  
input signal which is encoded in Dolby Digital,  
HDCD or PCM format.  
These modes are only available when the input  
signal has surround left and surround right  
contents.  
PCM audio signals can be subjected to Pro Logic  
IIx processing when the sampling frequency is 32  
kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.  
This additional channel provides the opportunity  
for more detailed imaging behind the listener and  
brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound  
localization than ever before.  
THX Surround EX will operate for any 5.1 channel  
source whenever THX is active.  
THX GAMES  
For the replay of stereo and multichannel game  
audio the THX Games mode should be selected. In  
this mode, THX ASA processing is applied to the  
surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0-encoded game  
sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby  
Digital. This accurately places all game audio  
surround information, providing a full 360-degree  
playback environment. THX Games mode is unique  
as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all  
points of the surround field.  
THX Surround EX is not available in system  
without surround back speaker(s).  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music  
EX/ES  
STEREO  
Note for HDCD  
This mode decodes 2 channel signals into 6  
channel signals using high-accuracy digital matrix  
technology.  
HDCD is effective only through digital input.  
This mode provides 6.1 channel surround for  
Dolby Digital EX, and DTS-ES-encoded source  
material such as DVD.  
This mode cannot be used when an analog input  
has been selected.  
This mode bypasses all surround processing.  
In stereo program sources, the left and right  
channels play normally when PCM audio or analog  
stereo is input.  
With Dolby Digital and DTS sources, the 5.1  
channels are converted to two channel stereo. 96  
kHz PCM source material can be played back in  
stereo mode.  
You may not be able to play some HDCD source  
signals from certain CD players if you connect the  
player to the SR9600 digitally. This is because the  
digital signal has been processed (such as the  
output level, sampling frequency or frequency  
response) and the SR9600 cannot recognize the  
signal as HDCD data.  
The DTS Neo:6 decoder has near-discrete  
properties in the frequency characteristics of the  
channels as well as in channel separation.  
According to the signals to be played back, DTS  
Neo:6 uses either the Neo:6 Cinema mode  
optimized for movie playback or the Neo:6 Music  
mode optimized for music playback.  
Dolby Digital EX  
In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have  
been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX  
technology are able to reproduce an extra channel  
which has been added during the mixing of the  
program.  
CAUTION  
Notes:  
Note for DTS  
The Neo:6 mode is available for 2 channel input  
signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital,  
HDCD or PCM format.  
This channel, called surround back, places sounds  
behind the listener in addition to the currently  
available front left, front center, front right,  
surround right, surround left and subwoofer  
channels.  
This additional channel provides the opportunity  
for more detailed imaging behind the listener and  
brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound  
localization than ever before.  
To connected DVD player, laserdisc player or CD  
player needs to support DTS digital output. You  
may not be able to play some DTS source signals  
from certain CD players and LD players even if  
you connect the player to the SR9600 digitally.  
This is because the digital signal has been  
processed (such as the output level, sampling  
frequency or frequency response), and the  
SR9600 cannot recognize the signal as DTS  
data.  
PCM audio signals can be subjected to Neo:6  
processing when the sampling frequency is 32  
kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.  
MULTI CH. ST  
This mode is used to create a wider, deeper and more  
natural soundstage from two channel source material.  
This is done by feeding the left channel signal to  
both the left front and left surround speakers and  
the right channel signal to both the right front and  
right surround speakers. Additionally, the center  
channel reproduces a mix of the right and left  
channels.  
Dolby Digital EX is not available in systems that do  
not have without surround back speaker(s).  
Depending on the player used, DTS play may  
produce a short noise. This is not a malfunction.  
DTS-ES (Discrete 6.1, Matrix 6.1)  
While signals from a DTS laserdisc or CD are  
playing in another surround mode, you cannot  
switch to digital input or from digital input to  
analog input from the INPUT SETUP in the  
MAIN MENU or by pressing the A/D button.  
DTS-ES adds the surround center channel audio  
to the DTS 5.1 channel format to improve the  
acoustic positioning, and makes acoustic image  
movement more natural with the 6.1 channel  
reproduction.  
CIRCLE SURROUND II  
(CSII-CINEMA, CSII-MUSIC, CSII-MONO)  
The SR9600 incorporates a DTS-ES-decoder,  
which can handle DTS-ES Discrete-encoded and  
DTS-ES Matrix-encoded program sources from  
DVD, etc.  
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 features digital discrete  
recording of all channels, including the surround  
back channel(s), and higher quality audio  
reproduction.  
You can not listen to DTS-encoded software in a  
multiroom.  
Circle Surround is designed to enable multichannel  
surround sound playback of non-encoded and  
multichannel encoded material.  
Backward compatibility provides listeners with up  
to 6.1 channels of surround performance from an  
entire collection of music and film, including  
broadcast, videotape and stereo recorded music.  
Depending on source material, you can select  
CSII-Cinema mode, CSII-Music mode or CSII-  
Mono mode.  
The outputs for VCR 1 OUT, DSS/VCR 2 OUT,  
TAPE OUT and CD-R OUT output analog audio  
signals only. Do not record from CDs or LDs that  
support DTS using these outputs. If you do, the  
DTS-encoded signal will be recorded as noise.  
DTS-ES is not available in systems that do not  
have surround back speakers.  
Note or Dolby Digital Surround EX  
When playing Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded  
software in 6.1 channels, it is required to set the  
EX/ES mode.  
dts  
Notes:  
Note that some Dolby Digital Surround EX-  
encoded software does not contain the  
identification signal. In this case, set the EX/ES  
mode manually.  
dts, Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music  
The CS II mode is available for 2 channel input  
signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital,  
HDCD or PCM format.  
This mode is for DTS-encoded source materials  
such as laserdisc, CD and DVD. Neo:6 is for some  
2 channel sources.  
PCM audio signals can be subjected to CS II  
processing when the sampling frequency is 32  
kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.  
Note for 96 kHz/192 kHz PCM audio  
dts  
The AUTO, Pure Direct, and Stereo modes can  
be used when playing PCM signals with a  
sampling frequency of 96/192 kHz (such as from  
DVD-Video/Audio discs).  
This mode is enabled when playing source  
materials encoded in dts multichannel.  
Playing multichannel encoded-5.1 channel dts  
sources provides five main audio channels (left,  
center, right, surround left and surround right) and  
a Low Frequency Effects channel.  
VIRTUAL  
This mode creates a virtualized surround sound  
experience from a two-speaker (front L and R)  
playback system playing any multichannel audio  
source (such as found on DVDs and digital  
broadcasts), including Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro  
Logic or DTS.  
Certain DVD player models inhibit digital output.  
For details, refer to the players operation manual.  
Some DVD discs feature copy protection. When  
using such disc, 96 kHz PCM signal are not output  
from the DVD player. For details, refer to the  
players operation manual.  
dts-ES decoding is not available in this mode.  
The DTS mode cannot be used when an analog  
input has been selected.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The relationship between the selected surround  
mode and the input signal  
The surround mode is selected with the surround  
mode selector on the SR9600 or the remote control  
unit. However, the sound you hear is subject to the  
relationship between the selected surround mode  
and the input signal. That relationship is as follows:  
Output Channel  
SL SBL  
Front Information Display  
Channel Status  
Surround Mode  
AUTO  
Input Signal  
Decoding  
L/R  
C
SubW Signal Format Indicators  
SR SBR  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
DTS-ES  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital 5.1  
Dolby Digital 2.0  
Pro Logic IIx movie  
DTS-ES  
DTS-96/24  
DTS 5.1  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz  
Multi Ch-PCM  
PCM (Stereo)  
PCM (Stereo)  
PCM (Stereo 96kHz)  
HDCD  
Stereo  
Multi Ch  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital 5.1  
Dolby Digital 2.0  
Pro Logic IIx movie  
DTS-ES  
DTS-96/24  
DTS 5.1  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz  
SA-CD (5.1ch)  
SA-CD (2ch)  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
2
2
2
2
DIGITAL EX  
DIGITAL  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
-
DIGITAL  
L, R  
L, R, S  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
DIGITAL  
2
SURROUND  
dts, ES  
dts 96/24  
dts  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
DTS 96/24  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
DTS (5.1ch)  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz  
SA-CD (5.1ch)  
SA-CD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
PCM 96kHz  
HDCD  
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
-
M-PCM  
M-PCM  
SA-CD  
SA-CD  
PCM  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
-
L, R  
-
-
-
L, R  
-
-
-
PCM  
L, R  
-
-
-
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
ANALOG  
L, R  
Analog  
7.1ch input  
-
-
-
-
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
-
SOURCE DIRECT  
PURE DIRECT  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
DTS-ES  
2
2
2
2
DIGITAL EX  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
-
L, R  
L, R, S  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
2
SURROUND  
dts, ES  
dts 96/24  
dts  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
DTS 96/24  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
DTS (5.1ch)  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz  
SA-CD (5.1ch)  
SA-CD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
PCM 96kHz  
HDCD  
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
-
M-PCM  
M-PCM  
SA-CD  
SA-CD  
PCM  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
-
L, R  
PCM (Stereo)  
PCM (Stereo 96kHz)  
HDCD  
Stereo  
Multi Ch  
-
-
-
L, R  
-
-
-
-
PCM  
L, R  
-
-
-
-
-
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
ANALOG  
L, R  
Analog  
7.1ch input  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
DTS-ES  
DTS (5.1ch)  
Multi-PCM  
-
-
-
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
EX/ES  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital EX  
DTS-ES  
2
DIGITAL EX  
DIGITAL  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
2
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
dts, ES  
dts  
M-PCM  
SA-CD  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
DTS-ES  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
Multi Ch-PCM + Dolby EX  
Multi Ch-PCM + Dolby EX  
Dolby Digital 5.1  
Dolby Digital 5.1  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
SA-CD (5.1ch)  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
Multi Ch-PCM  
SA-CD (5.1ch)  
SA-CD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
HDCD  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
DOLBY  
2
2
2
2
2
DIGITAL EX  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
(PLIIx movie)  
(PLIIx music)  
(PLIIx game)  
-
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
Dolby Digital 5.1 + PLII  
Pro Logic II  
Pro Logic II  
Multi Ch-PCM + PLII  
Multi Ch-PCM + PLII  
Pro Logic II  
Pro Logic II  
Pro Logic II  
Pro Logic II  
x
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
x
x
L, R  
L, R, S  
2
SURROUND  
x
x
M-PCM  
SA-CD  
SA-CD  
PCM  
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
ANALOG  
dts, ES  
dts 96/24  
dts  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
x
x
x
x
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
Analog  
-
-
7.1ch input  
Multi Ch-PCM + PLII  
DTS 5.1  
DTS-96/24  
DTS 5.1  
Neo:6  
x
DTS  
(Neo:6 Cinema)  
(Neo:6 Music)  
DTS-ES  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
DTS 96/24  
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
DTS (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
SA-CD (2ch)  
PCM(Audio)  
HDCD  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
2
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
L, R  
Neo:6  
2
2
2
SURROUND  
SURROUND  
L, R, S  
Neo:6  
SA-CD  
PCM  
L, R  
Neo:6  
L, R  
Neo:6  
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
L, R  
Analog  
Neo:6  
-
CSII Cinema  
CSII Music  
CSII Mono  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
SA-CD (2ch)  
PCM(Audio)  
HDCD  
CSII  
2
2
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
L, R  
CSII  
L, R, S  
CSII  
SA-CD  
L, R  
CSII  
PCM  
L, R  
CSII  
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
L, R  
Analog  
CSII  
-
STEREO  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
DTS-ES  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
2
2
2
2
DIGITAL EX  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
-
-
-
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
-
-
-
L, R  
L, R, S  
-
-
-
2
SURROUND  
-
-
-
dts, ES  
dts 96/24  
dts  
M-PCM  
M-PCM  
SA-CD  
SA-CD  
PCM  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
DTS 96/24  
-
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
DTS (5.1ch)  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz  
SA-CD (5.1ch)  
SA-CD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
PCM 96kHz  
HDCD  
-
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
-
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
-
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
-
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
-
-
-
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PCM  
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
-
-
-
Analog  
-
-
-
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes:  
Dolby Digital (2 channel L/R): Speakers for signal  
Output Channel  
SL SBL  
Front Information Display  
Channel Status  
Surround Mode  
Virtual  
Input Signal  
Decoding  
L/R  
C
SubW Signal Format Indicators  
SR SBR  
with Dolby Surround are fully equipped.  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
DTS-ES  
Virtual  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
2
2
2
2
DIGITAL EX  
DIGITAL  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
Virtual  
-
-
-
No sound is outputs from the surround speaker,  
center speaker and subwoofer if the DVD disc has  
no surround data.  
Virtual  
-
-
-
-
DIGITAL  
L, R  
L, R, S  
Virtual  
-
-
-
-
DIGITAL  
2
SURROUND  
Virtual  
-
-
-
-
dts, ES  
dts 96/24  
dts  
M-PCM  
SA-CD  
SA-CD  
PCM  
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
2
2
2
2
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
DTS 96/24  
Virtual  
-
-
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
DTS (5.1ch)  
Multi Ch-PCM  
SA-CD (5.1ch)  
SA-CD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
HDCD  
Virtual  
-
-
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
Virtual  
-
-
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
Virtual  
-
-
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
Virtual  
-
-
-
-
L, R  
Abbreviations  
Virtual  
-
-
-
-
L, R  
L/R : Front speakers  
C : Center speaker  
SL/SR : Surround speakers  
SBL/SBR : Surround back speakers  
SubW : Subwoofer  
Virtual  
-
-
-
-
L, R  
Analog  
Virtual  
-
-
-
-
-
Multi Ch.  
Stereo  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
DTS-ES  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital 5.1  
Multi Channel Stereo  
Multi Channel Stereo  
DTS-ES  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
DIGITAL EX  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
O
O
O
-
L, R  
L, R, S  
2
SURROUND  
dts, ES  
dts 96/24  
dts  
M-PCM  
M-PCM  
SA-CD  
SA-CD  
PCM  
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
2
2
2
2
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
DTS 96/24  
DTS-96/24  
DTS 5.1  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz  
Multi Ch-PCM  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
DTS (5.1ch)  
Multi Ch-PCM  
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz  
SA-CD (5.1ch)  
SA-CD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
HDCD  
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
Multi Channel Stereo  
Multi Channel Stereo  
Multi Channel Stereo  
Multi Channel Stereo  
Dolby H.P  
O
O
O
O
-
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
Analog  
-
Dolby H.P  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
DTS-ES  
DIGITAL EX  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
Dolby H.P  
-
-
-
-
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
Dolby H.P  
-
-
-
-
L, R  
L, R, S  
Dolby H.P  
-
-
-
-
2
SURROUND  
Dolby H.P  
-
-
-
-
dts, ES  
dts 96/24  
dts  
M-PCM  
SA-CD  
SA-CD  
PCM  
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
2
2
2
2
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
DTS 96/24  
Dolby H.P  
-
-
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
DTS (5.1ch)  
Multi Ch-PCM  
SA-CD (5.1ch)  
SA-CD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
HDCD  
Dolby H.P  
-
-
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
Dolby H.P  
-
-
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
Dolby H.P  
-
-
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
Dolby H.P  
-
-
-
-
L, R  
Dolby H.P  
-
-
-
-
L, R  
Dolby H.P  
-
-
-
-
L, R  
Analog  
Dolby H.P  
-
-
-
-
-
THX  
(THX Games)  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
DTS-ES  
Dolby Digital + THX Surround EX  
Dolby Digital 5.1+ THX 5.1  
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX  
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX  
DTS-ES + THX  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
DIGITAL EX  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R, S  
2
SURROUND  
dts, ES  
dts  
M-PCM  
SA-CD  
SA-CD  
PCM  
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
2
2
2
2
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
DTS (5.1ch)  
Multi Ch-PCM  
SA-CD (5.1ch)  
SA-CD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
HDCD  
DTS + THX 5.1  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
Multi Ch-PCM + THX5.1  
Multi Ch-PCM + THX5.1  
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX  
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX  
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX  
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX  
Dolby Digital + THX Surround EX  
Dolby Digital 5.1+ THX Ultra2 Cinema  
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX  
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX  
DTS-ES + THX  
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
Analog  
-
THX Ultra2  
(THX EX)  
(THX Music)  
(THX Games)  
Dolby Surr.EX  
Dolby D (5.1ch)  
Dolby D (2ch)  
Dolby D (2ch Surr)  
DTS-ES  
DIGITAL EX  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R, S  
2
SURROUND  
dts, ES  
dts  
M-PCM  
SA-CD  
SA-CD  
PCM  
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE  
DTS (5.1ch)  
Multi Ch-PCM  
SA-CD (5.1ch)  
SA-CD (2ch)  
PCM (Audio)  
HDCD  
DTS + THX Ultra2 Cinema  
Multi Ch-PCM + THX Ultra2 Cinema  
Multi Ch-PCM + THX Ultra2 Cinema  
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX  
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX  
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX  
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE  
L, R  
L, R  
L, R  
-
PCM, HDCD  
ANALOG  
Analog  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUTO VIDEO SELECTOR  
(AUTO VIDEO SEL)  
Function can be changed according to the  
detected video signal.  
ATTENUATION TO ANALOG INPUT  
SIGNAL  
If the selected analog audio input signal is greater  
than the capable level of internal processing, the  
PEAKindicator will light up on the front display.  
DOLBY HEADPHONE MODE  
This feature simulates the waveforms of the actual  
sounds heard from the speakers.  
When headphones are used, the MENU button  
automatically switches to the Dolby headphone  
mode.  
The OSD menu system that appears when the  
MENU button is pressed is shown below.  
OTHER FUNCTION  
The remote control operations in this chapter are  
performed with the remote control unit set to the  
Amp mode. To set the Amp mode, tap the A/V  
Amp on the Home screen on the remote control  
unit.  
1. Be sure the AUTO VIDEO SEL mode in the  
SETUP MENU is set to ENABLED. (See  
page 43 : 4. VIDEO SETUP)  
1. If this happens, you should tap the ATT on the  
remote control unit.  
VIDEO AUTO ON/OFF FUNCTION  
This function allows the component connected to  
the VIDEO input jack to control the power (ON/  
OFF) to the SR9600.  
The Auto Power On/Off mode is explained using a  
connected DVD player as an example.  
The ATTindicator is illuminated when this  
function is activated. The signal input level is  
reduced by about half.  
4
. V I D E O S E T U P  
HEAD PHONE  
V
V
I D E O A U T O O N  
I D E O C O L O R B A R  
DOLBY HP MODE  
SURROUND  
: BYPASS  
: ✽✽✽  
V
I D E O C O N V E R T  
:
:
:
E N A B L E  
D I S A B L E  
E N A B L E  
wed Jun 01  
5/8 A/V Amp  
Mode  
4:40pm  
A U T O  
O S D  
V
I D E O S E L  
I N F O  
L LEVEL  
R LEVEL  
: 0dB  
: 0dB  
AUTO POWER ON  
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
1. Connect a DVD player to the DVD VIDEO, S-  
VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO input jack.  
2. Be sure the Video on mode in the SETUP  
MENU is set to ENABLED. (See page 43 : 4.  
VIDEO SETUP) Turn on the DVD player.  
2. Turn on the power, for example, to the DVD  
player.  
3. The DVD Function is automatically selected.  
Notes:  
1.  
Select the desired DOLDBY HP (Headphone)  
mode with the or cursor buttons.  
BYPASS DH1 DH2 DH3 BYPASS  
4
. V I D E O S E T U P  
If a separate video signal (e.g., DSS, etc.) is input  
after another component has been automatically  
selected, the receiver switches to the DSS mode.  
Then, when that DSS signal ceases, the receiver  
searches for a component that is inputting a video  
signal and switches to it.  
V
V
I D E O A U T O O N  
I D E O C O L O R B A R  
BYPASS: Bypasses the Dolby headphone mode  
and delivers ordinary 2 channel stereo.  
2. To turn the attenuation feature off, tap the  
ATT on the remote control unit again.  
V
I D E O C O N V E R T  
A U T O  
O S D  
:
:
:
E N A B L E  
D I S A B L E  
E N A B L E  
DH1: The size of a typical living room space  
V
I D E O S E L  
is simulated.  
Notes:  
I N F O  
DH2: The expansiveness of a structure as  
Attenuation will not work with the output signal  
from TAPE OUT, CD-R/MD OUT, VCR1 OUT  
and VCR2/DVD-R OUT.  
This feature works with the VIDEO, S-VIDEO  
and COMPONENT VIDEO input jacks.  
large as a music hall is simulated.  
R E T U R N  
E X I T  
DH3: A large space such as that found in a  
Some progressive video signals cannot be  
detected when input to the COMPONENT  
VIDEO input jacks.  
movie theater is simulated.  
This function is memorized for each individual  
input source.  
3. Turn off the power to the DVD player and the  
SR9600.  
When the Pure Direct or Source Direct mode is  
selected, Dolby surround processing is bypassed  
and ✽✽✽is displayed as the mode indication.  
4. Turn on the DVD player.  
5. The SR9600 turns on and DVD player is  
selected automatically.  
Surround mode can be selected when DH1, DH2  
or DH3 is selected.  
LISTENING THROUGH HEADPHONES  
This jack may be used to listen to the SR9600s  
output through a pair of headphones. Be certain that  
the headphones have a standard 1/4stereo phono  
plug. (Note that the speakers will automatically be  
turned off when the headphone jack is in use.)  
The L/R level can be set in the 10 dB range.  
AUTO POWER OFF  
Notes:  
1. Turn the DVD player off.  
The surround mode returns to the previous setting  
as soon as the plug is removed from the jack.  
2. The power to the SR9600 switches to standby  
after approx. 5 minutes.  
The TONE cannot be set when DH1, DH2 or DH3  
is selected.  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR9600  
Notes:  
INPUT SELECTOR  
The Dolby Headphone mode will not work when  
96/192 kHz PCM digital signals are input.  
The Auto Power Off mode is canceled if the  
SR9600 is set to a source other than DVD.  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
DOWN  
SURROUND  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
Some progressive video signals cannot be  
detected when input to the COMPONENT  
VIDEO input jacks.  
MODE  
AUTO  
MULTI  
7.1CH INPUT  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
STANDBY  
MENU  
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
Note:  
The surround mode returns to the previous setting  
as soon as the plug is removed from the jack.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VIDEO ON/OFF  
DISPLAY MODE  
You can select the display mode for the front panel  
display on the SR9600.  
SELECTING ANALOG AUDIO INPUT  
OR DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT  
If you have already assigned the digital inputs, you  
can temporarily select the audio input mode for  
each input source.  
RECORDING AN ANALOG SOURCE  
In normal operation, the audio or video source  
selected for listening through the SR9600 is sent to  
the record outputs.  
This means that any program you are watching or  
listening to may be recorded simply by placing  
machines connected to the outputs for TAPE OUT,  
CD-R/MD OUT, VCR1 OUT, and VCR2/DVD-R  
OUT in the Record mode.  
When no video signal is connected to the SR9600  
or a DVD, etc., is connected directly to your TV, the  
unnecessary video circuit can be turned off by  
setting the video off mode.  
1. To select this mode, press the DISPLAY  
button on the front panel or tap the Display on  
the remote control.  
1. To set the video off mode, tap the A/V Amp  
and press the page up button until page 5/8 is  
displayed.  
1. Tap the A/V Amp and press the page up  
button until page 5/8 is displayed. Tap the A/D  
on the remote control unit.  
wed Jun 01  
5/8 A/V Amp  
Mode  
4:40pm  
1.  
Tap the Video off on the remote control unit.  
V-OFFindicator will be illuminated when this  
function is activated.  
VER SR9600  
wed Jun 01  
5/8 A/V Amp  
Mode  
4:40pm  
To record the input source signal you are  
currently watching or listening to  
1.  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
DOWN  
TUNING  
UP  
BAND  
F/P  
wed Jun 01  
5/8 A/V Amp  
Mode  
4:40pm  
1. Select the input source to record by turning  
the INPUT SELECTOR knob on the front  
panel or simply select a source from among  
the Source Select screen on page 1/8 on the  
remote control unit.  
SURROUND  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
MODE  
AUTO  
MULTI  
AUTO TUNE  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
MRAC  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
MIC  
1.  
1.  
The input source is now selected and you may  
watch or listen to it as desired.  
When this button is pressed, the Display  
mode is switched in the following sequence:  
wed Jun 01  
1/8 A/V Amp  
Source Select  
4:40pm  
1.  
Normal mode Level Meter mode Auto  
Display Off mode Display Off mode →  
Normal mode ....  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR9600  
When the A/D is tapped, the input mode is  
switched in the following sequence:  
Auto i.LINK HDMI DigitalAnalog  
Auto ....  
INPUT SELECTOR  
2. To cancel the Video Off mode, tap the Video  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
Normal mode:  
Displays the selected component.  
off on the remote control unit again.  
SURROUND  
MODE  
AUTO  
MUL  
1.  
Auto mode:  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
Level meter mode:  
Displays the current output level of up to 7.1  
channels as a bar graph.  
STANDBY  
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
The types of signals being input to the digital  
and analog input jacks for the selected input  
source are detected automatically.  
If no digital signal is being input, the analog input  
jacks are selected automatically.  
i.LINK mode:  
.
.
.
MULTI A B SPK SPKR A B  
SLEEP V-OFF Re-EQ NIGHT  
PEAK ATT  
HDMI  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL EX  
>
DVD:AT HDMI.2  
L
C
LFE  
S
R
2. The currently selected input source signal is  
output to TAPE OUT, CD-R/MD OUT, VCR1  
OUT, and VCR2/DVD-R OUT for recording.  
3. Start recording to the recording component as  
desired.  
S
S
dB  
+18.0  
B
S
L
S
W
S
R
B
R
i.LINK mode can be selected only when an  
i.LINK device has been assigned as an input  
source.  
SL  
SR  
L
L
C
R
Auto Display Off mode:  
The display is off. But, if you make a change to  
the unit such as the input or surround mode, the  
display will show that change, then go back to  
off after about 3 seconds. When changing the  
volume, it is not displayed.  
HDMI mode:  
HDMI mode can be selected only when an HDMI  
input has been assigned as an input source.  
Digital mode:  
The input signal is fixed to an assigned digital  
input terminal.  
Analog mode:  
The analog input jacks are selected.  
Display Off mode:  
The display is off completely.  
Note:  
Only the DISPindicator will be illuminated on  
the front panel display when the Display Off  
mode is selected.  
This selection is temporary and will not be stored in  
memory.  
To store changes to the input mode, select 1.  
INPUT SETUPfrom the MAIN MENU. (See page  
32)  
Only SBL is displayed in the Level Meter mode if  
"SURR.B" on the SPEAKER SIZE menu in the  
SETUP MENU is set to 1 channel (1CH).  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording the video from one source and  
the audio from another  
Adjust the speaker output levels so that you  
can hear the same sound level from each  
speaker at the listening position. For the front  
left, front right, center, surround left, surround  
right and surround back speakers, the output  
levels can be adjusted between 12 to +12 dB.  
The subwoofer can be adjusted between 18  
and +12 dB.  
7.1 CH INPUT  
The SR9600 is equipped for future expansion  
through support for SACD multichannel or DVD-  
Audio players.  
When this is selected, the input signals connected  
to the L (front left), R (front right), C (center), SL  
(surround left), SR (surround right), SBL (surround  
back left) and SBR (surround back right) channels  
of the 7.1 CH. In jacks are output directly to the  
front (left and right), center, surround (left and  
right) and surround back speaker systems as well  
as the pre-out jacks without passing through the  
surround circuitry.  
SPEAKER A/B  
wed Jun 01  
7/8 A/V Amp  
Speaker A/B  
4:40pm  
You can add the sound from one source to the  
video of another source to make your own video  
recordings.  
Below is an example of recording the sound from a  
compact disc player connected to CD IN and the  
video from a video camera connected to VCR1 to  
video cassette recorder connected to the VCR2/  
DVD-R OUT jack.  
VOLUME  
DOWN  
DOWN  
TUNING  
UP  
BAND  
F/P  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
MULTI  
AUTO TUNE  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
These adjustments result will be stored to the  
7.1 CH. Input memory.  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
MRAC  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX 1 INPUT  
DIGITAL  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
MIC  
3. Adjust the main volume with the VOLUME  
1. Switch the video input source to VCR1 by  
tapping the VCR1 on page 1/8 on the remote  
control unit.  
control knob on the front panel or the VOL  
/
buttons on the remote.  
I
n addition, the signal input to the SW (subwoofer)  
jack is output to the PRE OUT SW (subwoofer) jack.  
The video input source for 7.1 channel input is set  
on the 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP menu. (See page 33)  
This permits simultaneous viewing with video  
sources.  
3.  
The SR9600 allows you to select speaker system A  
and speaker system B for the front L/R channels.  
You can select these systems by pressing the  
SPEAKERS A/B button on the front panel or by  
tapping Spk-A on/off and Spk-B on/off (page 7/8)  
on the remote control unit.  
wed Jun 01  
1/8 A/V Amp  
Source Select  
4:40pm  
1.  
VOLUME  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR9600  
INPUT SELECTOR  
DOWN  
UP  
VOL  
CH  
S
OK  
P
BAND  
F/P  
3.  
2.  
1. Press the 7.1 CH INPUT button on the front  
panel or tap the 7.1 input on (page 1/8) on the  
remote control unit to switch to 7.1 channel  
input.  
TO TUNE  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
H
PURE DIRECT  
Ex  
M
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
1.  
MRAC  
EXIT  
SURROUN  
MODE  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
MIC  
PURE DIRE  
STANDBY  
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
AUX2 INPUT  
wed Jun 01  
1/8 A/V Amp  
Source Select  
4:40pm  
1.  
If you dont need to connect 7.1 channel input  
terminals for multichannel decoding, the L (front  
left) and R (front right) input terminals can be used  
for AUX2 input.  
In this case, you can connect additional audio  
sources to AUX2.  
RROUND RECEIVER SR9600  
To cancel the 7.1 CH. Input setting, press the 7.1  
CH INPUT button on the front panel or tap the 7.1  
input off on the remote control unit.  
1.  
2. Switch the audio input source to CD by  
tapping the CD on page 1/8 on the remote  
control unit.  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
DOWN  
TUNING  
UP  
Notes:  
SURROUND  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
MODE  
AUTO  
MULTI  
AUTO TUNE  
T-MODE  
3. CDis now selected as the audio input  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
When the 7.1 CH. Input mode is activated, you  
may not select a surround mode, as the external  
decoder determines processing.  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
1. To select AUX2, turn the INPUT SELECTOR  
knob on the front panel.  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
source and VCR1as the video input source.  
PHONES  
Notes:  
Tap the A/V Amp on the remote control unit  
and press the page up button until page 1/8 is  
displayed. Tap the AUX2 on the remote  
control unit.  
In addition, there is no signal sent to the record  
outputs when the 7.1 CH. Input mode is activated.  
If you change the input source during recording,  
you will record the signals from the newly  
selected input source.  
The SR9600 has two input modes: 5.1 channel  
and 7.1 channel. Set the input mode on the 7.1 CH  
INPUT SETUP menu. (See page 33)  
You cannot record surround effects.  
2. If it is necessary to adjust the output level of  
wed Jun 01  
1/8 A/V Amp  
Source Select  
4:40pm  
Digital input signals are only output to the digital  
outputs. There is no conversion from digital to  
analog.  
each channel, tap the CH Sel and Ch Level  
5.1 Channel Input mode:  
1.  
Surround processing such as for THX music is  
performed for 5.1 channel input, excluding  
surround back left and right channels.  
(PAGE6/8) on the remote control unit.  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR9600  
wed Jun 01  
6/8 A/V Amp  
Tone Adjust  
4:40pm  
INPUT SELECTOR  
When connecting CD players and other digital  
components, do not connect only the digital  
terminals, but the analog ones as well.  
7.1 Channel Input mode:  
Surround processing is not performed for 7.1  
channel analog input.  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
SURROUND  
MODE  
AUTO  
MULT  
7
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
STANDBY  
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
1.  
2.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(Using the remote control unit)  
DIRECT FREQUENCY CALL  
(FM) TUNING MODE (AUTO STEREO OR MONO)  
BASIC OPERATION  
1. To select the tuner and desired band (AM or  
wed Jun 01  
2/2 Tuner 1  
Tuner 1 : Key/RDS  
4:40pm  
wed Jun 01  
1/2 Tuner 1  
Tuner 1 : Main  
4:40pm  
wed Jun 01  
1/2 Tuner 1  
Tuner 1 : Main  
4:40pm  
FM), tap the AM or FM.  
(TUNER)  
2. Tap and hold the Tuning and for 1 sec or  
more.  
VOLUME  
This receiver incorporates two tuners with  
completely independent remote control buttons.  
Tuner 1 is used in this explanation.  
1.  
3. Automatic searching begins then stops when  
DOWN  
UP  
G
UP  
BAND  
F/P  
3.  
2.  
a station is tuned in.  
AUTO TUNE  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
If tuning does not stop at the desired station, use  
manual tuning.  
MRAC  
R
LISTENING TO THE TUNER  
EXIT  
AUX 1 INPUT  
DIGITAL  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
MIC  
The AM frequency scan increments are selectable.  
The default is 10 kHz increments. If your country's  
standard is 9 kHz increments, press and hold  
either the BAND button on the front panel or the  
AM button on the remote control unit for 5 sec or  
more. The new scan increments will be stored.  
MANUAL TUNING  
wed Jun 01  
1/2 Tuner 1  
Tuner 1 : Main  
4:40pm  
2. 1.  
1. To select the tuner and desired band (AM or  
FM), press the page up button on the remote  
control unit until page 2/2 appears.  
2. Tap the Frequency Direct. "FREQ ---" will  
When in the Auto Stereo mode, AUTOindicator  
is illuminated on the display.  
1.  
2.  
Note:  
The all Preset memory for the tuner will be cleared  
clear by changing this setting.  
DOWN  
The STindicator is illuminated when a stereo  
broadcast is tuned in.  
THX  
DOWN  
TUNING  
UP  
BAND  
F/P  
appear on the display.  
D
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
AUTO  
MULTI  
AUTO TUNE  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
3. Input your desired stations frequency with the  
numeric keypad on the remote control unit.  
4. The desired station will automatically be  
tuned.  
At open frequencies, the noise is muted and the  
TUNEDand STindicators are not illuminated.  
If the signal is weak, it may be difficult to tune into  
the station in stereo. In such a case, press the T-  
MODE button on the front panel or tap the Stereo/  
Mono on the remote control unit.  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
CT  
THX  
MRAC  
AUTO TUNING  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
DIGITAL  
MIC  
wed Jun 01  
1/2 Tuner 1  
Tuner 1 : Main  
4:40pm  
2. 1.  
1.  
2.  
AUTOindicator is illuminated on the display.  
(Using the SR9600)  
DOWN  
DOWN  
TUNING  
UP  
BAND  
F/P  
1. To select the tuner and desired band (AM or  
FM), press the BAND button on the front  
panel  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
TO  
MULTI  
AUTO TUNE  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
HX  
MRAC  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
DIGITAL  
S-V  
MIC  
2. Turn the GYRO TUNING dial on the front  
panel to select the desired station.  
(Using the remote control unit)  
1. To select the tuner and desired band (AM or  
(Using the SR9600)  
FM), tap the AM or FM.  
1. To select the tuner and desired band (AM or  
FM), press the BAND button on the front  
panel.  
2. Press the AUTO TUNE button on the front  
panel, and turn the GYRO TUNING dial to  
start the Auto Tuning mode.  
2. Tap the Tuning or  
.
Note:  
R e c e p t i o n s e n s i t i v i t y w o r s e n s w h e n  
simultaneously using tuner 1 and 2 in the below  
cases. In such case, moving the antennas farther  
apart improves reception.  
3. Automatic searching begins then stops when  
FM:  
a station is tuned in.  
Tuner 1 frequency + 10.7 MHz =  
Turner 2 frequency  
Tuner 2 frequency + 10.7 MHz =  
Turner 1 frequency  
AM:  
Tuner 1 frequency + 450 kHz = Turner 2 frequency  
Tuner 2 frequency + 450 kHz = Turner 1 frequency  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MANUAL PRESET MEMORY  
RECALLING A PRESET STATION  
PRESET SCAN  
PRESET MEMORY  
wed Jun 01  
1/2 Tuner 1  
Tuner 1 : Main  
4:40pm  
You can preset up to 50 AM/FM stations in any  
order. This memory is shared by both tuners 1 and  
2.  
wed Jun 01  
1/2 Tuner 1  
Tuner 1 : Main  
4:40pm  
1.  
wed Jun 01  
2/2 Tuner 1  
Tuner 1 : Key/RDS  
4:40pm  
3.  
2. 4.  
For each station, you can memorize the frequency  
and reception mode if desired.  
3.  
2.  
DOWN  
DOWN  
DOWN  
TUNING  
UP  
BAND  
F/P  
THX  
DOWN  
TUNING  
UP  
BAND  
F/P  
AUTO PRESET MEMORY  
1.  
3.  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
MULTI  
AUTO TUNE  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
AUTO  
MULTI  
AUTO TUNE  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
This function automatically scans the AM and FM  
band and enters all stations with proper signal  
strength into the memory.  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
MRAC  
THX  
MRAC  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
1.  
3.  
DIGITAL  
MIC  
DIGITAL  
MIC  
2. 4. 1. 3. 5.  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR9600  
(Using the SR9600)  
(Using the remote control unit)  
(Using the SR9600)  
VOLUME  
1. Tap the P-Scan on the remote control unit.  
PRESET SCANappears on the display and  
then the preset station with the lowest preset  
number is recalled first.  
2. Preset stations are recalled in sequence (No.  
1 No. 2 etc.) for 5 seconds each.  
No stored preset number will be skipped.  
3. You can fast forward through the preset  
stations by tapping the Preset  
continuously.  
INPUT SELECTOR  
1. Press the F/P button to show the preset  
station on the display. Select the desired  
preset station by rotating the GYRO TUNING  
dial on the front panel.  
1. Tune into the desired radio station. (See the  
MANUAL TUNINGor AUTO TUNING).  
2. Press the MEMORY button on the front panel.  
– –(preset number) starts blinking on the  
display.  
3. Select the preset number by rotating the  
GYRO TUNING dial, while it is still blinking  
(approx. 5 second)  
DOWN  
UP  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
DOWN  
TUNING  
UP  
BAND  
F/P  
SURROUND  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
MODE  
AUTO  
MULTI  
AUTO TUNE  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
MRAC  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
MIC  
(Using the remote control unit)  
1. Tap the Preset  
or  
to select the desired  
preset station, or input the desired preset  
channel with the numeric keypad on the  
remote control unit.  
4. Press the MEMORY button again to enter.  
The display stops blinking.  
When the desired preset station is received,  
cancel the preset scan operation by tapping  
the CLEAR or P-Scan.  
The station is now stored in the specified  
preset memory location.  
1. To select FM, press the BAND button on the  
front panel.  
2. While pressing the MEMORY button, rotate  
CHECKING THE PRESET STATIONS  
The preset broadcast stations can be checked on  
the onscreen display.  
(Using the remote control unit)  
the GYRO TUNING dial.  
1. Tune into the desired radio station. (See the  
AUTO PRESETwill appear on the display,  
and scanning starts from the lowest frequency.  
3. Each time the tuner finds a station, scanning  
will pause and the station will be played for  
five seconds.  
MANUAL TUNINGor AUTO TUNING).  
wed Jun 01  
1/2 Tuner 1  
Tuner 1 : Main  
4:40pm  
2. Tap the Memo on the remote control unit. – –  
(preset number) starts blinking on the  
display.  
3. Enter the desired preset number by tapping  
During this time, the following operations are  
possible.  
the numeric keypads.  
Note:  
The band can be changed by pressing the  
BAND button.  
When entering a single digit number (2 for  
example), either input 02or just input 2and  
wait for a few seconds.  
4. If no button is pressed during this period, the  
current station is memorized in location Preset  
02.  
1.  
2.  
If you wish to skip the current station, rotate  
the GYRO TUNING dial during this period.  
This station is skipped and auto presetting  
continues.  
(Using the remote control unit)  
1. Tap the Info. to view a list of tuner preset  
stations on the onscreen display.  
5. Operation stops automatically when all 50  
preset memory positions are filled or when  
auto scanning has reached the upper limit of  
all bands. If you desire to stop the auto preset  
memory at anytime, press the CLEAR button.  
2. If there are 10 or more preset stations, press  
the Info. button again.  
Note:  
The preset station indication disappears in about 5  
sec.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CLEARING STORED PRESET STATIONS  
SORTING PRESET STATIONS  
NAME INPUT OF THE PRESET STATION  
Numeric keypad Display  
You can remove preset stations from the memory  
using the following procedure.  
This function allows the name of each preset  
channel to be entered using alphanumeric  
characters.  
Before inputting names, you need to store preset  
stations with the preset memory operation.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
A
D
G
J
B
E
H
C
F
I
1
2
A
D
G
J
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR9600  
VOLUME  
INPUT SELECTOR  
3
4
2.  
3.  
K
L
wed Jun 01  
2/2 Tuner 1  
Tuner 1 : Key/RDS  
4:40pm  
DOWN  
UP  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
DOWN  
TUNING  
UP  
BAND  
F/P  
M
P
S
V
Y
N
Q
T
O
5
9
M
SURROUND  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
4.  
2. 5. 6.  
4.  
R
U
X
6
P
S
V
5.  
MODE  
AUTO  
MULTI  
AUTO TUNE  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
VOLUME  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
7
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
MRAC  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR9600  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
MIC  
W
Z
8
DOWN  
UP  
VOLUME  
INPUT SELECTOR  
BAND  
F/P  
space  
Y
DOWN  
UP  
NE  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
DOWN  
TUNING  
UP  
BAND  
F/P  
+
/
0
ISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
3.  
2.  
MRAC  
SURROUND  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
EXIT  
MODE  
AUTO  
MULTI  
AUTO TUNE  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
MIC  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
To erase the character, press the CLEAR  
button or tap the CLR on the remote control  
unit.  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
MRAC  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX 1 INPUT  
If you have stations memorized, and there is a gap  
in the sequential order:  
e.g., the stations are stored as follows  
1) 87.1 MHz  
DIGITAL  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
MIC  
5. After selecting the first character to be  
entered, press the MEMORY button on the  
front panel or press the OK / ENTER button.  
The entry in this column is fixed and the next  
column starts to flash. Fill the next column  
using the same method.  
1. Recall the preset number to be cleared with  
the method described in RECALLING A  
PRESET STATION.  
2. Press the MEMORY button on the front panel  
or tap the Memo on the remote control unit.  
3. The stored preset number blinks in the display  
for 5 seconds. While blinking, press the  
CLEAR button on the front panel or tap the  
CLR on the remote control unit.  
2) 93.1 MHz  
3) 94.7 MHz  
10) 105.9 MHz  
wed Jun 01  
2/2 Tuner 1  
Tuner 1 : Key/RDS  
4:40pm  
(notice there are no stations programmed for  
presets for 4-9), you can have pre set 10 become  
preset 4:  
To sort the numbers, press and hold the MEMORY  
and the F/P buttons.  
PRESET SORTwill appear on the display and  
sorting will be done.  
To move back and forth between the  
characters, rotate the GYRO TUNING dial or  
press or cursor buttons on the remote  
control unit.  
2.  
4.  
4. xx CLEARappears on the display to  
indicate that the specified preset number has  
been cleared.  
Note:  
Unused columns should be filled by entering  
blanks.  
6. To save the name, press the MEMORY button  
or the OK button on the remote control unit for  
more than 2 seconds.  
Note:  
1. Recall the desired preset number with the  
method described in RECALLING A  
PRESET STATION.  
To clear all stored preset stations, press and hold the  
CLEAR and the F/P buttons for two seconds.  
2. Press the MEMORY button on the front panel  
or press the Memo on the remote for more  
than 3 seconds.  
3. The leftmost column of the station name  
indicator flashes, indicating the character  
entry ready status.  
4. When press the cursor  
/
buttons on the  
buttons are  
front panel or the cursor  
/
pressed on the remote control unit alphabetic  
and numeric characters will be displayed in  
the following order:  
A B C ...Z 1 2 3..... 0 + /  
(Blank) A  
UP →  
DOWN  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATION TO MULTI ROOM OUT WITHOUT THE  
REMOTE CONTROLLER.  
MULTIROOM SPEAKER OPERATION FROM THE  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING  
THE MULTI SPEAKER TERMINALS  
The SR9600 allows you to connect another set of  
speakers and place them in a different room or  
separated area for listening to music.  
MULTIROOM  
SYSTEM  
The Multiroom system is a mode which allows you  
to listen to the same or a different source in two  
rooms other than the room in which the SR9600 is  
located.  
1. Press the MULTI button. A menu appears for  
wed Jun 01  
1/6 Multi room A  
MULTI-ROOM A  
4:40pm  
wed Jun 01  
2/6 Multi room A  
MULTI-A : Source  
4:40pm  
setting the source and volume for rooms A  
and B. Select a room with the  
or  
cursor  
buttons. The "MULTI" indicator flashes for  
approx. 10 seconds.  
3.  
OPERATION TO MULTI ROOM SPEAKER WITHOUT  
THE REMOTE CONTROL UNIT.  
2.  
2.  
2. Select the input source using the INPUT  
SERECTOR knob.  
To use this function, a multiroom remote unit and  
remote control signal receiver available from your  
Marantz dealer are necessary.  
3. Set the volume level in the multiroom as  
desired.  
2.  
1.  
3.  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR9600  
This will only set the volume in the MULTI A or  
B rooms.  
The operations possible with the multiroom mode  
are explained briefly below.  
For details, refer to the instruction manual supplied  
with the multiroom remote control unit and receiver.  
VOLUME  
INPUT SELECTOR  
4. Press the SLEEP button to set the sleep timer  
DOWN  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
DOWN  
TUNING  
UP  
BAND  
F/P  
for the selected room.  
SURROUND  
MULTI  
1. Tap either the Multi room A or Multi room B  
on the Home screen.  
MODE  
AUTO  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
AUTO TUNE  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
To output to multirooms A and B, connect the  
video from the MULTI OUT A/B jacks to the  
monitors in multirooms A and B as shown in the  
connection example on page 27. Connect the  
audio from the MULTI OUT A/B jacks to the amps  
in multirooms A and B. Or, you can also connect  
the MULTI SPK (LEFT/RIGHT) terminals to the  
speakers in multirooms A and B.  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
Note:  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
MRAC  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
MIC  
2. Tap the Multi Spk on on page 1/6. The MULTI  
A·SPK (MULTI B·SPK) screen appears on the  
display. Set the volume with the Volume + and  
.  
Settings can be performed from the MAIN MENU  
as well. (See page 44)  
MULTIROOM OPERATION FROM THE REMOTE  
CONTROL UNIT  
3. Press the page up button until page 2/6  
1. Press the MULTI SPEAKER button. SPKR A  
DVDis displayed and the MULTIindicator  
flashes for approx. 10 seconds.  
To set the Multiroom Speaker mode to room  
B, press the MULTI SPEAKER button again.  
2. Select the input source using the INPUT  
SELECTOR knob.  
appears. Select an input source.  
wed Jun 01  
2/6 Multi room A  
MULTI-A : Source  
4:40pm  
wed Jun 01  
1/6 Multi room A  
MULTI-ROOM A  
4:40pm  
The SR9600 supports some Multiroom system  
features such as source selector, OSD  
information, sleep timer, Multiroom Speaker output  
and remote control.  
The multiroom feature of the SR9600 allows use in  
two rooms, A and B, however the Multispeaker  
mode can be used in only one of the two rooms.  
Note:  
2.  
2.  
When the Multispeaker mode is set to room A,  
"MULTI A·SPK" appears on the display. When  
the Multispeaker mode is set to room B, "MULTI  
B·SPK" appears on the display.  
3.  
3. Set the volume level in the multiroom as  
desired.  
This will only set the volume in the multiroom.  
MULTIROOM PLAYBACK USING THE  
MULTI ROOM OUT TERMINALS  
Note:  
The Multiroom Speaker mode can also be set  
from the MAIN MENU. (See page 44)  
The SR9600s MULTI ROOM A/B output terminals  
include audio pre-out terminals for which the  
volume is adjustable and composite video output  
terminals.  
A stereo power amplifier (sold separately) can be  
connected to enjoy multi room playback.  
1. Tap either the Multi room A or Multi room B  
button on the Home screen.  
2. Tap the Power on button on page 1/6. The  
MULTI Aor MULTI Bappears on the  
display. Set the volume with the Volume + and  
.  
Notes for Multi Room Speaker  
The Multiroom Speaker mode can be set for only  
one of the rooms, A or B.  
2.  
1. 1.  
The MULTI ROOM SPEAKER output terminals  
can be used when Surround Back Speaker =  
NONEin the SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See  
SPEAKER SETUP, page 38)  
3. Press the page up button until page 2/6  
appears. Select the input source.  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR9600  
Notes:  
VOLUME  
INPUT SELECTOR  
For more information about the Multi room A (or  
Multi room B) screens (pages 1/6-6/6), see page  
13.  
• “The Surr. Back Speakers are in useis  
displayed when the MULTI SPEAKER button is  
pressed when the Surround Back Speaker is not  
set to NONEin the SPEAKER SETUP menu.  
(See SPEAKER SETUP, page 38)  
DOWN  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
DOWN  
TUNING  
UP  
BAND  
F/P  
SURROUND  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
MODE  
AUTO  
MULTI  
AUTO TUNE  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
When only Multiroom A is on, "MULTI A"  
appears on the display. When only Multiroom B is  
on, "MULTI B" appears on the display. When  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
MRAC  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
MIC  
The Multispeaker mode cannot be used at the  
same time as the speaker C. When connecting for  
multiroom use, set the SPEAKER C selector  
switch on the rear panel to OFF.  
.
both Multirooms A and B are on, "MULTI A B"  
appears on the the display.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General:  
Controlling volume level, sleep timer and muting.  
Selecting input audio and video source.  
Tuner 1 or 2:  
OPERATION OF THE MULTIROOM  
OUTPUTS WITH THE REMOTE  
CONTROL FROM MULTI A OR B ROOM  
Selecting the band, changing preset channel up  
and down, tuning up and down, direct frequency  
call, T-MODE and preset Scan.  
wed Jun 01  
1/6 Multi room A  
MULTI-ROOM A  
4:40pm  
wed Jun 01  
1/6 Multi room B  
MULTI-ROOM B  
4:40pm  
1.  
4.  
1.  
4.  
4. To view OSD information, tap the OSD on  
2.  
2.  
page 1/6.  
Notes for the Multiroom System  
The MULTI ROOM OUT (MULTI OUT/MULTI  
SPEAKER) terminals have analog outputs.  
Digital input signals are not supported.  
If the Tuner 1 (AM or FM) is active in the main  
room, you can not control any function of Tuner 1  
from multiroom A or B. However, Tuner 2 can be  
controlled.  
1. Press MULTI on the multi room remote control  
from the multiroom.  
Tap the Multi room A (or Multi room B) on  
the Home screen on the remote control unit.  
Tap the Power on on page 1/6.  
In this case, you must listen to the same station as  
in the main room.  
OSD information cannot be displayed  
simultaneously in both Multirooms A and B.  
The multiroom video output will show OSD  
information for the MULTIROOM A(B) setup.  
When the component with RC-5 bus is connected  
to the MULTI RC IN jack (see page 27),  
Multiroom A can be operated using the RC codes  
for the main room. The remote control units of  
other Marantz products can also be used to control  
multiroom A.  
M U L T  
I
R
OM  
A
O
M U L T  
M U L T  
I
I
R O OM  
S P K R  
: O N  
: O F F  
S L E E P  
V I D E O  
A U D I O  
T
I M E R : 9 0 m i n .  
: D S S 1  
: T U N E R 1  
F M 1 0 2 . 0 0 M H z  
V O L UM E S E T U P : V A R I A B L E  
V O L UM E L E V E L : - 9 0 d B  
-
-
-
M A I N R O OM S T A T U S  
-
- -  
V I D E O : D V D  
A U D I O : D V D  
M U L T  
I
R O OM  
B
M U L T  
M U L T  
I
I
R O OM  
S P K R  
: O N  
: O N  
S L E E P  
V I D E O  
A U D I O  
T
I M E R : 9 0 m i n .  
: D S S 1  
: T U N E R 2  
AM 1 0 0 0 k H z  
V O L UM E S E T U P : F X E D  
V O L UM E L E V E L : - 9 0 d B  
I
-
-
-
M A I N R O OM S T A T U S  
-
- -  
V I D E O : D V D A U D I O : D V D  
2. Tap the VOL + or VOL on the multiroom A or  
B remote control to set the desired volume.  
3. In Multiroom mode, the multiroom remote  
control can be used in the multiroom to  
operate the following functions.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYMPTOM  
CAUSE  
REMEDY  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Cannot select the EX/ES or  
THX EX mode.  
Surround Back = NONE has been Make the correct setting.  
selected in the SPEAKER SIZE menu.  
In case of trouble, check the following before calling for service:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Are the connections made properly?  
Are you operating the unit properly following the users guide?  
Are the power amplifiers and speaker working properly?  
The input signal is incompatible.  
Use a 5.1channel source.  
Cannot select THX ULTRA 2  
CINEMA MUSIC, GAMES.  
Surround Back = 1ch, NONE has been Make the correct setting.  
selected in the SPEAKER SIZE menu  
If the unit does not operate properly, check items shown in the following table.  
The input signal is incompatible.  
The input signal is incompatible.  
Use a 5.1channel source.  
If your trouble cannot be recovered with the remedy actions listed in the following table, malfunction of the  
internal circuitry is suspected; immediately unplug the power cable and contact your dealer, nearest  
Marantz authorized dealer or the Marantz Service Center in your country.  
Cannot select the Neo:6  
mode.  
Use a 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM  
input signal or analog input signal.  
Ca not select the CSII mode. The input signal is incompatible.  
Use a 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM  
input signal or analog input signal.  
SYMPTOM  
CAUSE  
REMEDY  
No output to SUBWOOFER  
OUT.  
Subwoofer = NONE has been selected Select Subwoofer = YES.  
in the Setup mode.  
The SR9600 cannot be turned on. The power plug is not connected.  
Connect the power plug to the outlet.  
Cancel mute using the remote control unit.  
No sound and picture are  
Mute is on.  
Noise is produced during DTS- Analog has been selected for input.  
encoded CD or laserdisc play.  
Be sure to perform digital connection, select digital  
input, then play.  
output even when power is on.  
The input cable is not connected See the connection diagram and connect the  
correctly. cables correctly.  
A specific channel does not  
produce output.  
Nothing recorded on source.  
Check the encoded channel on the source side.  
The master volume control is turned all Adjust the master volume.  
the way down.  
AM or FM reception fails.  
Antenna connection is incomplete.  
Correctly connect the indoor AM and FM antennas  
to AM and FM antenna outlets.  
The function selector position is wrong. Select the correct position.  
Noise is heard during AM  
reception.  
Reception is affected by other electrical Try changing the location where the AM indoor  
fields. antenna is set up.  
No speaker output.  
The headphones are connected to the Disconnect the headphones. (Speakers will not  
headphone jack.  
output sound when headphones are connected.)  
Noise is heard during FM  
reception.  
The radio waves from the broadcasting Install an FM outdoor antenna.  
station are weak.  
Incorrect audio or video for  
selected source.  
The input cable is connected incorrectly. Connect the cable correctly by referring to the  
connection diagram.  
Cannot get programmed  
station when the PRESET  
button is pressed.  
Preset data has been erased.  
Disconnecting power plug for long periods of time  
will erase preset data. If this happens, input the  
preset data again.  
Incorrect audio from a channel. The speaker cable is connected incorrectly. Connect the cable correctly by referring to the  
connection diagram.  
Control with the remote  
control unit fails.  
Batteries are exhausted.  
Replace all the batteries with new ones.  
No audio is output from the  
center channel speaker.  
The center speaker cable connection is Connect the cable correctly.  
incomplete.  
Remote control unit function key setting Select a different position from which equipment  
is wrong. will be controlled.  
STEREO has been selected for the When STEREO is selected for the Surround mode,  
Surround mode.  
no sound will be output from the center speaker.  
Set another Surround mode.  
The distance between the SR9600 and Move closer to the SR9600.  
the remote control unit is too far.  
Center = NONE has been selected in Make the correct setting.  
SETUP mode.  
Something is blocking the SR9600 and Remove the offending object.  
the remote control unit.  
No audio is output from the  
surround speakers.  
The surround speaker cable connection Connect the cable correctly.  
is incomplete.  
MRAC is not working.  
Headphones are connected.  
Disconnect the headphones.  
STEREO has been selected for the When STEREO has been selected for the  
Surround mode.  
Surround mode, no sound will be output from the  
surround speaker. Set another Surround mode.  
Surround = NONE has been selected in Make the correct setting.  
the SETUP mode.  
Note:  
After PROTECTappears on the units display, the standby indicator may start flashing. If it does, there is a  
problem in the unit or the connection. If this problem reoccurs even when power is activated from the remote  
control unit, call for servicing.  
No audio is output from the  
surround back speakers.  
The surround back speaker cable Connect the cable correctly.  
connection is incomplete.  
The surround mode is not EX/ES mode. Set surround mode EX/ES.  
Surround back = NONE has been Make the correct setting.  
selected in the SPEAKER SIZE menu.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYMPTOM  
CAUSE  
REMEDY  
HDMI  
Super Audio CD is not  
played back over an  
HDMI connection.  
The current HDMI connection  
does not support Super Audio  
CDs.  
Use an analog connection.  
SYMPTOM  
CAUSE  
REMEDY  
The display does not  
appear over an HDMI  
connection.  
The connected monitor or  
projector does not support HDCP.  
The HDMI input of on the TV is Set HDMI input so that it turns on, as  
not on. explained in the TV's instruction manual.  
The HDMI output on the source Set HDMI output so that it turns on, as  
component (DVD, Set Top Box, explained in the source component's  
i.LINK (AUDIO)  
etc.) is not on.  
instruction manual.  
SYMPTOM  
CAUSE  
REMEDY  
The HDMI mode is not correctly Set HDMI input on the FUNC INPUT  
set on the SR9600. SETUP menu as explained on page 33.  
Audio is not played back The connected component  
Use a component that supports i.LINK  
(Audio).  
over an i.LINK  
connection.  
does not support i.LINK  
(Audio).  
The HDMI output video resolution Set the resolution so that it matches, as  
of the source component (DVD,  
Set Top Box, etc.) does not  
match the TV specifications.  
explained in the instruction manuals of  
both components.  
The connected component  
does not support DTCP (Digital  
Transmission Content  
Protection).  
Use a device that supports DTCP.  
The device is connected with a A 5 m or shorter cable is recommended  
non-standard HDMI cable.  
to ensure stable operation and prevent  
image quality deterioration.  
The i.LINK mode on the  
SR9600 is not correctly set.  
Set i.LINK input on the SETUP menu as  
explained on page 34.  
Power to the SR9600 is off.  
(When the SR9600 is on  
standby, HDMI connections  
cannot be turned on.)  
Turn on the power to the SR9600.  
The i.LINK output of the source  
component (DVD, etc.) is not on. explained in the source component  
instruction manual.  
Set i.LINK output so that it turns on, as  
The connection between HDMI Shut off and then turn the power back on  
Power to one of the  
components in a daisy chain or connection.  
tree connection is not on.  
Turn on power to all devices in the i.LINK  
components was not  
authenticated.  
to the SR9600, TV and source  
component.  
The SR9600 SETUP menu  
does not support HDMI output. or VIDEO output.  
Use the COMPONENT VIDEO, S-VIDEO  
The SR9600 SETUP  
menu does not appear  
over an HDMI connection.  
There are too many i.LINK  
devices outputting signals on the  
i.LINK bus.  
Disconnect unused i.LINK devices.  
The connection is being  
authenticated between the  
HDMI devices.  
There is nothing wrong with the system.  
Some HDMI devices require time for  
authentication.  
Time is needed for the  
display of an HDMI  
connection to appear.  
There is nothing wrong with the system.  
Some components require time for  
authentication.  
Audio is not played back Authentication is being  
for a few seconds when performed for copyright  
the input source is  
changed or the power is  
shut off and turned back  
on.  
protection.  
The HDMI audio output of the  
source component (DVD, Set  
Top Box, etc.) is not on.  
Set the HDMI audio output so that it turns  
on, as explained in the source  
component's instruction manual.  
Audio is not played back  
over an HDMI  
connection.  
The analog audio of the Components disable analog  
connected component is output when an i.LINK  
Change the i.LINK setting on the  
component.  
The signal format of the source Set the HDMI audio output so that it can  
component (DVD, Set Top Box, connect to the SR9600, as explained in  
not played back over  
i.LINK.  
connection is on.  
etc.) is not supported by the  
SR9600.  
the source component's instruction  
manual.  
The digital output of the Components disable digital  
connected component is output when an i.LINK  
Change the i.LINK setting on the  
component.  
The SR9600 is set to the HDMI In the THROUGHmode, sound is not  
audio THROUGHmode.  
produced from the SR9600. Set it to  
ENABLE. (see page 44)  
not played back over  
i.LINK.  
connection is on.  
The DVD player does not  
support CPPM, therefore it  
cannot output HDMI audio.  
Use a DVD-Audio player that supports  
CPPM.  
Turn on PCM downsampling on the  
DVD player.  
DVD-Audio is not played  
back over an HDMI  
connection.  
Use an analog connection.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL MALFUNCTION  
AM TUNER SECTION  
If the equipment malfunctions, this may be  
because an electrostatic discharge or AC line  
interference has corrupted the information in the  
equipment memory circuits. Therefore:  
DIMENSIONS  
Frequency Range.................................... 520 - 1710 kHz  
Signal to Noise Ratio ..............................................50 dB  
Usable Sensitivity ........................................ Loop 400  
µV  
Distortion .................................. 400Hz, 30 % Mod. 0.5%  
Selectivity ............................................... 20 kHz 70 dB  
-
-
disconnect the plug from the AC line supply  
after waiting at least three minutes, reconnect  
the plug to the AC line supply  
AUDIO SECTION  
Power Output (20 Hz - 20 kHz/THD=0.08%)  
-
re-attempt to operate the equipment  
Front L&R ........................................... 8 ohms 140 W/Ch  
Center ................................................ 8 ohms 140 W/Ch  
Surround L&R .................................... 8 ohms 140 W/Ch  
Surround Back L&R ........................... 8 ohms 140 W/Ch  
Memory backup  
• In case a power outage occurs or the power  
cord is accidentally unplugged, the SR9600  
is equipped with a backup function to  
prevent memory data such as the preset  
memory from being erased.  
Front L&R ........................................... 6 ohms 170 W/Ch  
Center ................................................ 6 ohms 170 W/Ch  
Surround L&R .................................... 6 ohms 170 W/Ch  
Surround Back L&R ........................... 6 ohms 170 W/Ch  
Input Sensitivity/Impedance ............. 200 mV/ 47 Kohms  
Signal to Noise Ratio(Analog Input / Pure Direct) ...... 105 dB  
Frequency Response  
(Analog Input / Pure Direct)  
HOW TO RESET THE UNIT  
.......................................... 8 Hz - 100 kHz ( 3 dB)  
(Digital Input / 96 kHz PCM)  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR9600  
........................................... 8 Hz - 45 kHz ( 3 dB)  
VOLUME  
INPUT SELECTOR  
VIDEO  
DOWN  
UP  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
DOWN  
TUNING  
UP  
BAND  
F/P  
Television Format .................................................. NTSC  
Input Level/Impedance ........................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms  
Output Level/Impedance ........................ 1 Vp-p/75 ohms  
Video Frequency Response ....... 5 Hz to 8 MHz (1 dB)  
Video Frequency (Component) ... 5 Hz to 80 MHz (1 dB)  
S/N .........................................................................60 dB  
SURROUND  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
MODE  
AUTO  
MULTI  
AUTO TUNE  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
MRAC  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX  
S-VIDEO  
1
INPUT  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
MIC  
HDMI  
17-5/16 ins. (440 mm)  
Version ....................................................................... 1.1  
Should the operation or display seem to be abnormal,  
reset the unit with the following procedure.  
With the SR9600 turned on, press and hold the  
MRAC and PURE DIRECT buttons simultaneously  
for 3 seconds or more.  
GENERAL  
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR9600  
VOLUME  
INPUT SELECTOR  
Power Requirement .............................. AC 120 V 60 Hz  
Power Consumption ................................................ 6.5 A  
Weight ................................................. 57.3 lbs (26.0 Kg)  
DOWN  
UP  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
DOWN  
TUNING  
UP  
BAND  
F/P  
SURROUND  
MULTI  
SPEAKER  
Remember that the procedure will reset the  
settings of the function selector, Surround mode,  
delay time (tuner preset) etc., to their initial  
settings.  
MODE  
AUTO  
MULTI  
AUTO TUNE  
T-MODE  
MEMORY  
CLEAR  
ACCESSORIES  
7.1CH INPUT  
DISPLAY  
SPEAKERS  
A/B  
PURE DIRECT  
THX  
MRAC  
STANDBY  
ENTER  
MENU  
EXIT  
AUX 1 INPUT  
DIGITAL  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
POWER ON/STANDBY  
PHONES  
MIC  
Remote Control Unit RC3200B ..................................... 1  
Microphone MC-10 ....................................................... 1  
AA-size Batteries .......................................................... 3  
FM Antenna ................................................................... 2  
FM Antenna Adaptor ..................................................... 2  
AM Loop Antenna ......................................................... 2  
Front AUX Jack Cover ................................................. 1  
AC cable ....................................................................... 1  
RS232C Cable .............................................................. 1  
TECHNICAL  
SPECIFICATIONS  
FM TUNER SECTION  
Specifications subject to change without prior notice.  
Frequency Range................................ 87.5 - 108.0 MHz  
Usable Sensitivity ............................ IHF 1.8 V/16.4 dBf  
µ
Signal to Noise Ratio ................... Mono/Stereo 75/70 dB  
Distortion ..................................... Mono/Stereo 0.2/0.3%  
Stereo Separation ....................................... 1 kHz 45 dB  
Alternate Channel Selectivity ............... 300 kHz 60 dB  
Image Rejection ....................................... 98 MHz 70 dB  
Tuner Output Level ........... 1 kHz, 75 kHz Dev 800 mV  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You can find your nearest authorized distributor or dealer on our website.  
U.S.A.  
Marantz America, Inc.  
Marantz Europe B.V.  
1100 Maplewood Drive, Itasca, IL 60143, U.S.A.  
EUROPE  
P.O. Box 8744, 5605 LS Eindhoven, The Netherlands  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works. © 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.  
is a registered trademark.  
Printed in Japan  
05/2005  
00M11AJ851250 mzh-g  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Krell Industries Stereo Amplifier Surround Sound Preamp Processor User Manual
Leica Digital Camera SP2600 User Manual
Liebherr Ice Maker 120309 7084442 00 User Manual
Lifebreath Ventilation Hood RNC10 User Manual
Lightolier Work Light QVC2GPFOS1FT User Manual
Linear Chipper D 21A K User Manual
Martin Audio Speaker System LE1500 User Manual
Matrox Electronic Systems Stereo Equalizer ATC RG 200DL User Manual
Memorex CD Player MP3223 User Manual
Middleby Marshall Oven PS528G User Manual